Yamaha RX V2065 Owner's Manual U

User Manual: Yamaha RX-V2065 Owner's Manual

Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 114 [warning: Documents this large are best viewed by clicking the View PDF Link!]

RX-V2065_cd_U
RX-V2065_om_U

RX-V2065

AV R e c e i ve r

OWNER’S MANUAL

00_RX-V2065_U_cv.fm Page 1 Wednesday, June 24, 2009 4:10 PM

Black process 45.0° 240.0 LPI

Caution-i En

• Explanation of Graphical Symbols

The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol, within an

equilateral triangle, is intended to alert you to the

presence of uninsulated “dangerous voltage” within

the product’s enclosure that may be of sufficient

magnitude to constitute a risk of electric shock to

persons.

The exclamation point within an equilateral triangle

is intended to alert you to the presence of important

operating and maintenance (servicing) instructions in

the literature accompanying the appliance.

1Read these instructions.

2Keep these instructions.

3Heed all warnings.

4Follow all instructions.

5Do not use this apparatus near water.

6Clean only with dry cloth.

7Do not block any ventilation openings. Install in accordance

with the manufacturer’s instructions.

8Do not install near any heat sources such as radiators, heat

registers, stoves, or other apparatus (including amplifiers)

that produce heat.

9Do not defeat the safety purpose of the polarized or

grounding-type plug. A polarized plug has two blades with

one wider than the other. A grounding type plug has two

blades and a third grounding prong. The wide blade or the

third prong are provided for your safety. If the provided plug

does not fit into your outlet, consult an electrician for

replacement of the obsolete outlet.

10 Protect the power cord from being walked on or pinched

particularly at plugs, convenience receptacles, and the point

where they exit from the apparatus.

11 Only use attachments/accessories specified by the

manufacturer.

12 Use only with the cart, stand, tripod, bracket,

or table specified by the manufacturer, or sold

with the apparatus. When a cart is used, use

caution when moving the cart/apparatus

combination to avoid injury from tip-over.

13 Unplug this apparatus during lightning storms or when

unused for long periods of time.

14 Refer all servicing to qualified service personnel. Servicing

is required when the apparatus has been damaged in any

way, such as power-supply cord or plug is damaged, liquid

has been spilled or objects have fallen into the apparatus, the

apparatus has been exposed to rain or moisture, does not

operate normally, or has been dropped.

IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS

FCC INFORMATION (for US customers)

1 IMPORTANT NOTICE: DO NOT MODIFY THIS UNIT!

This product, when installed as indicated in the instructions

contained in this manual, meets FCC requirements. Modifications

not expressly approved by Yamaha may void your authority,

granted by the FCC, to use the product.

2 IMPORTANT:

When connecting this product to accessories

and/or another product use only high quality shielded cables.

Cable/s supplied with this product MUST be used. Follow all

installation instructions. Failure to follow instructions could void

your FCC authorization to use this product in the USA.

3NOTE:

This product has been tested and found to comply with

the requirements listed in FCC Regulations, Part 15 for Class “B”

digital devices. Compliance with these requirements provides a

reasonable level of assurance that your use of this product in a

residential environment will not result in harmful interference with

other electronic devices.

This equipment generates/uses radio frequencies and, if not

installed and used according to the instructions found in the users

manual, may cause interference harmful to the operation of other

electronic devices.

Compliance with FCC regulations does not guarantee that

interference will not occur in all installations. If this product is

found to be the source of interference, which can be determined by

turning the unit “OFF” and “ON”, please try to eliminate the

problem by using one of the following measures:

Relocate either this product or the device that is being affected by

the interference.

Utilize power outlets that are on different branch (circuit breaker or

fuse) circuits or install AC line filter/s.

In the case of radio or TV interference, relocate/reorient the

antenna. If the antenna lead-in is 300 ohm ribbon lead, change the

lead-in to coaxial type cable.

If these corrective measures do not produce satisfactory results,

please contact the local retailer authorized to distribute this type of

product. If you can not locate the appropriate retailer, please

contact Yamaha Electronics Corp., U.S.A. 6660 Orangethorpe

Ave, Buena Park, CA 90620.

The above statements apply ONLY to those products distributed by

Yamaha Corporation of America or its subsidiaries.

CAUTION

CAUTION: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF

ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT REMOVE

COVER (OR BACK). NO USER-SERVICEABLE

PARTS INSIDE. REFER SERVICING TO

QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL.

RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK

DO NOT OPEN

Caution-ii En

1To assure the finest performance, please read this manual

carefully. Keep it in a safe place for future reference.

2Install this sound system in a well ventilated, cool, dry, clean

place – away from direct sunlight, heat sources, vibration,

dust, moisture, and/or cold. Allow ventilation space of at least

30 cm on the top, 20 cm on the left and right, and 20 cm on

the back of this unit.

3Locate this unit away from other electrical appliances, motors,

or transformers to avoid humming sounds.

4Do not expose this unit to sudden temperature changes from

cold to hot, and do not locate this unit in an environment with

high humidity (i.e. a room with a humidifier) to prevent

condensation inside this unit, which may cause an electrical

shock, fire, damage to this unit, and/or personal injury.

5Avoid installing this unit where foreign objects may fall onto

this unit and/or this unit may be exposed to liquid dripping or

splashing. On the top of this unit, do not place:

– Other components, as they may cause damage and/or

discoloration on the surface of this unit.

– Burning objects (i.e. candles), as they may cause fire,

damage to this unit, and/or personal injury.

– Containers with liquid in them, as they may fall and liquid

may cause electrical shock to the user and/or damage to

this unit.

6Do not cover this unit with a newspaper, tablecloth, curtain,

etc. in order not to obstruct heat radiation. If the temperature

inside this unit rises, it may cause fire, damage to this unit,

and/or personal injury.

7Do not plug in this unit to a wall outlet until all connections

are complete.

8Do not operate this unit upside-down. It may overheat,

possibly causing damage.

9Do not use force on switches, knobs and/or cords.

10 When disconnecting the power cable from the wall outlet,

grasp the plug; do not pull the cable.

11 Do not clean this unit with chemical solvents; this might

damage the finish. Use a clean, dry cloth.

12 Only voltage specified on this unit must be used. Using this

unit with a higher voltage than specified is dangerous and may

cause fire, damage to this unit, and/or personal injury. Yamaha

will not be held responsible for any damage resulting from use

of this unit with a voltage other than specified.

13 To prevent damage by lightning, keep the power cord and

outdoor antennas disconnected from a wall outlet or the unit

during a lightning storm.

14 Do not attempt to modify or fix this unit. Contact qualified

Yamaha service personnel when any service is needed. The

cabinet should never be opened for any reasons.

15 When not planning to use this unit for long periods of time

(i.e. vacation), disconnect the AC power plug from the wall

outlet.

16 Install this unit near the AC outlet and where the AC power

plug can be reached easily.

17 Be sure to read the “Troubleshooting” section on common

operating errors before concluding that this unit is faulty.

18 Before moving this unit, press LMAIN ZONE ON/OFF to

set this unit to the standby mode, and disconnect the AC

power plug from the wall outlet in the main room.

19 VOLTAGE SELECTOR (Asia and General models only)

The VOLTAGE SELECTOR on the rear panel of this unit

must be set for your local main voltage BEFORE plugging

into the AC wall outlet. Voltages are:

.....AC 110/120/220/230-240 V, 50/60 Hz (General model)

.........................AC 220/230-240 V, 50/60 Hz (Asia model)

20 The batteries shall not be exposed to excessive heat such as

sunshine, fire or like.

21 Excessive sound pressure from earphones and headphones can

cause hearing loss.

Caution: Read this before operating your unit.

WARNING

TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRIC

SHOCK, DO NOT EXPOSE THIS UNIT TO RAIN

OR MOISTURE.

As long as this unit is connected to the AC wall outlet,

it is not disconnected from the AC power source even

if you turn off this unit by LMAIN ZONE ON/OFF.

In this state, this unit is designed to consume a very

small quantity of power.

FOR CANADIAN CUSTOMERS

To prevent electric shock, match wide blade of plug to

wide slot and fully insert.

This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian

ICES-003.

POUR LES CONSOMMATEURS CANADIENS

Pour éviter les chocs électriques, introduire la lame la

plus large de la fiche dans la borne correspondante de

la prise et pousser jusqu’au fond.

Cet appareil numérique de la classe B est conforme à

la norme NMB-003 du Canada.

IMPORTANT

Please record the serial number of this unit in the space

below.

MODEL:

Serial No.:

The serial number is located on the rear of the unit.

Retain this Owner’s Manual in a safe place for future

reference.

Caution-iii En

■Notes on remote controls and batteries

• Do not spill water or other liquids on the remote control.

• Do not drop the remote control.

• Do not leave or store the remote control in the following

conditions:

– places of high humidity, such as near a bath

– places of high temperatures, such as near a heater or stove

– places of extremely low temperatures

– dusty places

• Insert the battery according to the polarity markings (+ and -).

• Change all batteries if you notice the following conditions:

– the operation range of the remote control narrows

– the transmit indicator does not flash or is dim

• If the batteries run out, immediately remove them from the

remote control to prevent an explosion or acid leak.

• If you find leaking batteries, discard the batteries

immediately, taking care not to touch the leaked material. If

the leaked material comes into contact with your skin or gets

into your eyes or mouth, rinse it away immediately and

consult a doctor. Clean the battery compartment thoroughly

before installing new batteries.

• Do not use old batteries together with new ones. This may

shorten the life of the new batteries or cause old batteries to

leak.

• Do not use different types of batteries (such as alkaline and

manganese batteries) together. Specification of batteries may

be different even though they look the same.

• Before inserting new batteries, wipe the compartment clean.

• If the remote control is without batteries for more than 2

minutes, or if exhausted batteries remain in the remote

control, the contents of the memory may be cleared. In such a

case, install new batteries and set the remote control code.

• Dispose of batteries according to your regional regulations.

COMPLIANCE INFORMATION STATEMENT (DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY PROCEDURE

Responsible Party: Yamaha Electronics Corporation, U.S.A.

Address: 6660 Orangethorpe Avenue

Buena Park, CA 90620

Telephone: 714-522-9105

Fax: 714-670-0108

Type of Equipment: AV Receiver

Model Name: RX-V2065

• This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.

• Operation is subject to the following conditions:

– This device may not cause harmful interference.

– This device must accept any interference received including

interference that may cause undesired operation.

See the Troubleshooting section at the end of this manual if

interference to radio reception is suspected.

We Want You Listening For A Lifetime

Yamaha and the Electronic Industries Association’s Consumer Electronics Group want you to get the most out of your

equipment by playing it at a safe level. One that lets the sound come through loud and clear without annoying blaring or

distortion – and, most importantly, without affecting your sensitive hearing. Since hearing damage from loud sounds is

often undetectable until it is too late, Yamaha and the Electronic Industries Association’s Consumer Electronics Group

recommend you to avoid prolonged exposure from excessive volume levels.

1 En

English

INTRODUCTION

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION APPENDIX

PREPARATION

BASIC

OPERATION

ADVANCED

OPERATION

Features.................................................................... 2

About this manual................................................... 3

Supplied accessories................................................ 3

Part names and functions....................................... 4

Front panel ................................................................. 4

Rear panel .................................................................. 5

Front panel display..................................................... 6

Remote control........................................................... 6

Simplified remote control .......................................... 8

Quick start guide..................................................... 9

Connections ........................................................... 10

Placing speakers....................................................... 10

Connecting speakers ................................................ 11

Information on jacks and cable plugs ...................... 13

Connecting a TV monitor or projector .................... 14

Connecting other components ................................. 16

Connecting a Yamaha iPod universal dock or

Bluetooth™ wireless audio receiver.................... 18

Connecting to the network ....................................... 19

Connecting a USB storage device ........................... 19

Using the VIDEO AUX jacks.................................. 19

Connecting the FM and AM antennas ..................... 20

Connecting the power cable..................................... 20

Turning this unit on and off ..................................... 20

Optimizing the speaker setting for your

listening room (YPAO) ..................................... 21

Using Auto Setup..................................................... 21

When an error message is displayed during

measurement ........................................................ 23

When a warning message is displayed after

measurement ........................................................ 23

Playback................................................................. 24

Basic procedure........................................................ 24

Using the SCENE function ...................................... 24

Selecting a source on the GUI screen ...................... 25

Muting audio output................................................. 25

Adjusting high/low frequency sounds

(tone control) ....................................................... 25

Enjoying pure hi-fi sound ........................................ 25

Using your headphones............................................ 26

Changing information on the front panel display .... 26

Enjoying the sound field programs ..................... 27

Selecting sound field programs................................ 27

Enjoying unprocessed input sources

(Straight decode mode)........................................ 30

Enjoying sound field programs without surround

speakers (Virtual CINEMA DSP) ....................... 30

Enjoy sound field programs with headphones

(SILENT CINEMA™) ........................................ 30

Using CINEMA DSP 3D mode ............................... 30

FM/AM tuning ...................................................... 31

Tuning in to the desired FM/AM station

(Frequency tuning) .............................................. 31

Registering FM/AM stations and tuning in

(Preset tuning)...................................................... 31

Using HD Radio™ features

(U.S.A. model only) ...........................................33

Selecting HD Radio™ audio programs ................... 33

Using the iTunes Tagging feature............................ 33

Displaying HD Radio™ information....................... 34

XM® Satellite Radio tuning

(U.S.A. model only) ...........................................35

Connecting XM Mini-Tuner Home Dock ............... 35

Activating XM Satellite Radio ................................ 35

XM Satellite Radio® operations ............................. 36

Registering XM Satellite Radio channels ................ 37

Displaying the XM Satellite Radio™

information .......................................................... 38

SIRIUS Satellite Radio™ tuning

(U.S.A. model only)........................................... 39

Connecting the SiriusConnect™ tuner .................... 39

Activating SIRIUS Satellite Radio™

subscription.......................................................... 39

SIRIUS Satellite Radio™ operations...................... 39

Registering SIRIUS Satellite Radio™ channels...... 41

Setting the Parental Lock......................................... 42

Displaying the SIRIUS Satellite Radio™

information .......................................................... 43

Using iPod™.......................................................... 44

Controlling iPod™................................................... 44

Using Bluetooth™ components ........................... 46

Pairing the Bluetooth™ wireless audio receiver

and your Bluetooth component............................ 46

Playback of the Bluetooth™ component ................. 46

Using USB storage devices................................... 47

Playback of the USB storage device........................ 47

Using PC servers................................................... 48

Windows Media Player 11 setup ............................. 48

Playback of PC music contents................................ 48

Using the Internet Radio feature......................... 50

Listening to Internet Radio ...................................... 50

Using the Rhapsody® service

(U.S.A. model only)........................................... 51

Account setup for Rhapsody®................................. 51

Playback of Rhapsody® contents............................. 51

Other functions ..................................................... 53

Selecting the HDMI OUT jack ................................ 53

Using the HDMI™ control function........................ 53

Using the sleep timer ............................................... 53

Setting the option menu for each input source

(Option menu)................................................... 54

Option menu items................................................... 54

Selecting a video signal to be output during an

audio reproduction............................................... 56

Operating various settings for this unit

(Setup menu) ..................................................... 57

Basic operation of the Setup menu .......................... 59

Using multi-zone configuration ........................... 69

Connecting Zone2/3................................................. 69

Controlling Zone2/3................................................. 71

Controlling other components with the remote

control................................................................ 72

Setting remote control codes.................................... 72

Resetting all remote control codes........................... 72

Advanced setup..................................................... 73

Troubleshooting .................................................... 75

Glossary ................................................................. 88

Sound field program information ....................... 91

Information on HDMI™...................................... 92

Specifications......................................................... 93

Index ...................................................................... 94

(at the end of this manual)

Contents

INTRODUCTION

PREPARATION

BASIC OPERATION

ADVANCED OPERATION

APPENDIX

Information about software...................................i

List of remote control codes.................................iii

2 En

INTRODUCTION

■Built-in 7-channel power amplifier

•Minimum RMS Output Power (20 Hz to 20 kHz, 0.08%

THD, 8 Ω)

•FRONT L/R: 130 W + 130 W

•CENTER: 130 W

•SURROUND L/R: 130 W + 130 W

•SURROUND BACK L/R: 130 W + 130 W

■Speaker/Preout outputs

•Speaker terminals (7-channel), extra speaker terminals

(2-channel for presence or Zone2, 2-channel for

Zone3), preout jacks (7.1-channel)

■Input/Output terminals

Input terminals

•HDMI input x 5 (rear x 4, front V-AUX x 1)

•Audio/Visual input

[Audio] Digital input (coaxial) x 2, digital input

(optical) x 2, analog input x 3 (rear x 2, front V-AUX

x 1)

[Video] Component video x 2, Video x 5 (rear x 4,

front V-AUX x 1)

•Audio input (analog) x 2

•Phono input (analog) x 1

•Multi-channel audio input (7.1-channel)

•DOCK terminal to connect a Yamaha iPod universal

dock (such as YDS-11, sold separately) or Bluetooth

wireless audio receiver (such as YBA-10, sold

separately)

•USB port to connect a USB storage device

•NETWORK port to connect a PC or access the Internet

Radio and Rhapsody® (U.S.A. model only) via LAN

Output terminals

•Monitor output

[Audio/Video] HDMI x 2

[Video] Component video x 1, Video x 1

•Audio/Visual output

[Audio] Analog x 1

[Video] Video x 1

•Audio output

Digital (optical) x 1, Analog x 1

•Zone2/3 output

Analog x 2

Other terminals

Remote input x 1, Remote output x 1

Trigger output x 2

■Proprietary Yamaha technology for the

creation of sound fields

•CINEMA DSP 3D

•Compressed Music Enhancer mode

•Virtual CINEMA DSP

•SILENT CINEMA

■Digital audio decoders

•Dolby TrueHD, Dolby Digital Plus decoder

•DTS-HD Master Audio, DTS-HD High Resolution

Audio, DTS Express

•Dolby Digital/Dolby Digital EX decoder

•DTS, DTS 96/24 decoder, DTS-ES Matrix 6.1, DTS-ES

Discrete 6.1

•Dolby Pro Logic/Dolby Pro Logic II/Dolby Pro Logic

IIx decoder

•DSD decoder

•DTS NEO:6 decoder

•Neural Surround decoder (U.S.A. model only)

■Radio tuners

•HD Radio digital broadcast reception capability (U.S.A.

model only)

•

XM Satellite Radio tuning capability, using XM Mini-

Tuner and Home Dock, sold separately (U.S.A. model only)

•

SIRIUS Satellite Radio tuning capability, using

SiriusConnect tuner, sold separately (U.S.A. model only)

■

HDMI™ (High-Definition Multimedia Interface)

•HDMI interface for standard, enhanced or high-

definition video as well as multi-channel digital audio.

–Automatic audio and video synchronization (lip sync)

information capability

–Deep Color video signal (30/36 bit) transmission

–“x.v.Color” video signal transmission capability

–High refresh rate and high resolution video signals

–High definition digital audio format signals capability

•Analog to analog and HDMI digital video up-

conversion (video ↔ component video → HDMI)

capability for monitor out

•

Analog video input up-scaling for HDMI digital video

output 480i(576i) or 480p(576p)

→

720p, 1080i or 1080p

•HDMI control function supported

•Dual HDMI output (possible to select individual or

simultaneous output)

■Automatic speaker setup features

•“YPAO” (Yamaha Parametric Room Acoustic

Optimizer) for automatically optimizing speaker

outputs suitable for listening environments.

■Other features

•192-kHz/24-bit D/A converter

•GUI (graphic user interface) menus to optimize this unit

to suit individual audiovisual system

•iPod, USB and PC file browsing

•Album art display capability

•Pure Direct mode for pure hi-fi sound for all sources

•Adaptive dynamic range controlling capability

•SCENE function for changing input sources and sound

field programs with one key

•Bi-amplification connection capability

•Multi-zone function (Zone2/3)

•DHCP automatic or manual network configuration

•iTunes Tagging function (U.S.A. model only)

Features

3 En

English

INTRODUCTION

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION APPENDIX

PREPARATION

BASIC

OPERATION

ADVANCED

OPERATION

Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories.

Dolby, Pro Logic and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby

Laboratories

Manufactured under license under U.S. Patent No’s:

5,451,942;5,956,674;5,974,380;5,978,762;6,226,616;6,487,535 &

other U.S. and worldwide patents issued & pending. DTS is a

registered trademark and the DTS logos, Symbol, DTS-HD and DTS-

Neural Surround™ name and related logos are trademarks owned

by Neural Audio Corporation.

iPod™

“iPod” is a trademark of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other

countries.

MPEG Layer-3 audio coding technology licensed from

Fraunhofer IIS and Thomson.

This receiver supports network connections.

Bluetooth™

Bluetooth is a registered trademark of Bluetooth SIG and is used by

Yamaha in accordance with a license agreement.

“HDMI”, the “HDMI” logo and “High-Definition Multimedia

Interface” are trademarks, or registered trademarks of HDMI

Licensing LLC.

x.v.Color

“x.v.Color” is a trademark of Sony Corporation.

“SILENT CINEMA” is a trademark of Yamaha Corporation.

SIRIUS, XM and all related marks and logos are trademarks of Sirius

available in Alaska and Hawaii.

HD Radio™ Technology Manufactured Under License From iBiquity

Digital Corp. U.S. and Foreign Patents. HD Radio™ and the HD

Radio logo are proprietary trademarks of iBiquity Digital Corp.

Rhapsody and the Rhapsody logo are registered trademarks of

RealNetworks, Inc.

Check that you received all of the following parts.

•Remote control (page 6)

•Simplified remote control (page 8)

•Batteries (2) (AAA, R03, UM-4) (page 6)

•Power cable (page 20)

•Optimizer microphone (page 21)

•AM loop antenna (page 20)

•Indoor FM antenna (page 20)

•VIDEO AUX input cover (page 19)

About this manual

•Some operations can be performed by using either the keys on the front panel or the ones on the remote control. In case the key names differ between

the front panel and the remote control, the key name on the remote control is given in parentheses.

•This manual is printed prior to production. Design and specifications are subject to change in part as a result of improvements, etc. In case of

differences between the manual and product, the product has priority.

•For better viewing, we increase the size of characters used in example screen images in this manual. Therefore the size ratio of characters to other

objects (such as icons) may be different from that of the actual display image.

•“LMAIN ZONE ON/OFF” or “dHDMI 1” (example) indicates the name of the parts on the front panel or the remote control. Refer to the

attached sheet or “Part names and functions” (page 4) for the information about each position of the parts.

•☞ indicates the page describing the related information.

•y indicates a tip for your operation.

Supplied accessories

4 En

AZONE2 ON/OFF

Switches Zone2 on and off (page 71).

BHDMI THROUGH

Lights up in the following cases while this unit is on standby.

• when the HDMI control function is on

• when the HDMI signal standby-through function is currently

working

CZONE3 ON/OFF

Switches Zone3 on and off (page 71).

DZONE CONTROLS

Selects a zone to control with the main amplifier operations

(page 71).

EINFO

Changes information (input, DSP program, audio decoder, etc)

displayed on the front panel display (page 26).

FPRESET l / h

Selects an FM/AM preset station (page 32) or an XM/SIRIUS

preset channel (pages 37 and 41).

GMEMORY

Registers FM/AM stations as preset stations (page 32) or XM/

SIRIUS channels as preset channels (pages 37 and 41).

HBAND (CATEGORY)

Change the tuner bands between FM and AM.

Select a channel category for a XM/SIRIUS.

ITUNING/CH l / h

Changes FM/AM frequencies or XM/SIRIUS tuner channels.

JFront panel display

Displays information on this unit (page 6).

KVOLUME control

Controls the volume of this unit (page 24).

LMAIN ZONE ON/OFF

Turns this unit on and off (page 20).

MPHONES jack

For plugging headphones (page 26).

NUSB port

For connecting a USB memory device or USB portable audio

player (page 19)

OTONE CONTROL

Adjusts high-frequency/low-frequency output of speakers

(page 25).

PPROGRAM selector

Changes sound field programs (page 27).

QSTRAIGHT

Toggles between the selected sound field program and straight

decode mode (page 30).

RSCENE

Switches between linked sets of input sources and sound field

programs (page 24).

SPURE DIRECT

Changes mode to Pure Direct mode (page 25). This key lights up

when Pure Direct mode is on.

TINPUT selector

Selects an input source (page 24).

UOPTIMIZER MIC jack

For connecting the supplied optimizer microphone and adjusting

output characteristics of speakers (page 21).

VVIDEO AUX jacks

For connecting a game console, camcorder or digital camera to

either the HDMI IN jack or analog AUDIO/VIDEO jacks

(page 19).

Part names and functions

Front panel

ON/OFF

PHONES

MAIN ZONE

SILENT CINEMA

TONE CONTROL

PROGRAM

STRAIGHT PURE DIRECT

INPUT

OPTIMIZER MIC

VIDEO

HDMI IN

AUDIO

THROUGH

VIDEO

AUX

VOLUME

HDMI

EFFECT

BD/DVD

RADIO

SCENE

INFO

PRESET

lhlh

MEMORY

ZONE2

ON/OFF

ZONE

CONTROLS

ZONE3

ON/OFF

BAND

CATEGORY

TUNING/CH

USB

LPSOQ T

ABC D E G HFIJK

UMN R V

5 En

Part names and functions

English

INTRODUCTION

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION APPENDIX

PREPARATION

BASIC

OPERATION

ADVANCED

OPERATION

aSIRIUS jack

For connecting a SiriusConnect tuner (sold separately)

(page 39).

DOCK terminal

For connecting an optional Yamaha iPod universal dock (YDS-

11) or Bluetooth wireless audio receiver (YBA-10) (page 18).

XM jack

For connecting XM Mini-Tuner in XM Mini-Tuner Home Dock

(sold separately) (page 35).

bPHONO jacks

For connecting a turntable (page 16).

GND terminal

For connecting a turntable to reduce noise in the signal

(page 16).

cRS-232C terminal

Control expansion terminal for factory use only. Consult your

dealer for details.

dTRIGGER OUT 1/2 jacks

For connecting an external terminal with a trigger input terminal

to operate it linked with operation of this unit. Consult your

dealer for details.

eHDMI OUT 1/2 jacks

For connecting HDMI-compatible video monitors (page 14).

HDMI 1-4 jacks

For connecting external components for HDMI inputs 1-4

(page 16).

ANTENNA terminals

For connecting supplied FM and AM antennas (page 20).

MONITOR OUT jacks

Outputs visual signals from this unit to a video monitor, such as

a TV (page 14).

REMOTE IN/OUT jacks

For connecting an external component that supports the remote

control function (page 18).

fNETWORK port

For connecting to the network (page 19).

gSPEAKERS terminals

For connecting front, center, surround and surround back

speakers (page 11). Connect the presence speakers (page 11) or

the speakers for Zone2/3 (page 70) to EXTRA SP terminals.

hDIGITAL AUDIO jack

Outputs audio signals from a selected digital audio input source

to an external component (page 16).

iAV 1-6 jacks

For connecting external components for audio/visual inputs 1-6

(page 16).

jAV OUT jacks

Outputs audio/visual signals from a selected analog input source

to an external component (page 16).

kAUDIO 1/2 jacks

For connecting external components for audio inputs 1-2

(page 16).

lMULTI CH INPUT jacks

For connecting a player that supports a multi-channel output

(page 18).

mAUDIO OUT jacks

Outputs audio signals from a selected analog input source to an

external component (page 16).

ZONE2/3 OUT jacks

Output sound of this unit to an external amplifier set in a

different zone (page 69).

nPRE OUT jacks

Outputs multi-channel signals from up to 7.1 channels to an

external amplifier (page 18).

oAC IN

For connecting the supplied power cable (page 20).

Rear panel

AC IN

DOCK

PHONO RS

232C

TRIGGER OUT

NETWORK

COMPONENT

VIDEO

OPTICAL

OUT

( TV )

AV 1

AV 2

COAXIAL

AV 3

(CD)

COAXIAL OPTICAL

AV 4 AV 5 AV 6

OUT

AUDIO1 AUDIO2

FRONT

SURROUND

SUR.BACK

SUBWOOFER

MULTI CH INPUT

AUDIO

OUT

ZONE3

OUT

ZONE2

OUT

FRONT

SURROUND

SUR. BACK SUBWOOFER

PRE OUT

CENTER

SINGLE

VIDEO

HDMI OUT 2HDMI OUT 1

ANTENNA

UNBAL.

HD Radio

GND

HDMI 1

(BD/DVD)

(HDMI CONTROL)

HDMI 2 HDMI 3 HDMI 4

VIDEO

OUT

MONITOR OUT

SPEAKERS

12V

0.1A MAX.

FRONT

CENTER

SINGLE

CLASS 2 WIRING

SURROUND

SURROUND BACK/

BI-AMP

ZONE2/PRESENCEZONE3

CENTER

REMOTE

COMPONENT

VIDEO

SIRIUS

DIGITAL

AUDIO

GND

EXTRA SP

SP2 SP1

bca

ijbhklmno

dfeg

6 En

Part names and functions

aHDMI indicator

Lights up during normal communication when HDMI is

selected as an input source.

OUT 1/OUT 2 indicators

The respective indicator lights up when HDMI signals are

output from the HDMI OUT 1/2 jacks.

bXM indicator

Lights up when an XM tuner is selected as an input source.

cSIRIUS indicator

Lights up when a SiriusConnect tuner is selected as an input

source.

dHD indicator

Lights up when this unit is tuned into the HD Radio reception

band (page 33).

eTAG indicator

Lights up when the selected HR Radio program (or song being

played) supports the iTunes Tagging feature (page 33).

fCINEMA DSP indicator

Lights up when a sound field program that uses CINEMA DSP

is selected.

gCINEMA DSP 3D indicator

Lights up when CINEMA DSP 3D is activated.

hTuner indicator

Lights up during receiving radio broadcast signals from an FM/

AM station (page 31).

iZONE2/ZONE3 indicator

Lights up when Zone2 or Zone3 is turned on.

jSLEEP indicator

Lights up when the sleep timer is activated (page 53).

kMUTE indicator

Flashes when audio is muted.

VOLUME indicator

Displays volume levels.

lCursor indicators

Light up if corresponding cursors on the remote control are

available for operations.

mMulti information display

Displays menu items and settings for the current operation.

nSpeaker indicators

Indicate speaker terminals from which signals are currently

output.

Note

•Before installing batteries or using the remote control, make sure that you read “Notes on remote controls and batteries” in the “Caution” section.

■Installing batteries

aTake off the battery compartment cover.

bInsert the two supplied batteries (AAA, R03, UM-4)

according to the polarity markings (+ and -) on the

inside of the battery compartment.

cSnap the battery compartment cover back into the

place.

■Operation range

The remote control transmits a directional infrared ray. Be

sure to aim the remote control directly at the remote

control sensor on this unit during operation.

Front panel display

STEREO

SLEEP

TAG VOL.

TUNED

PL PR

SL SR

SBL SB SBR

MUTE

SIRIUS

ZONE

OUT 1 OUT 2

ab gfdecjihk

lm nl

SL SR

SBL SB SBR

PL PR

Subwoofer

Front L

Surround L

Surround back L

Center

Front R

Surround R

Surround back R

Surround back

Presence L Presence R

Remote control

30 30

Remote control sensor window

within 6 m (20 ft)

7 En

Part names and functions

English

INTRODUCTION

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION APPENDIX

PREPARATION

BASIC

OPERATION

ADVANCED

OPERATION

aRemote control signal transmitter

Transmits infrared signals.

bZone selection switch

Switches amplifiers (main, Zone2 or Zone3) to be operated by

the remote control (page 71).

cSOURCE POWER

Switches an external component on and off.

dInput selection keys

eTuner keys

fINFO

Changes the information shown on the front panel display

(page 26).

gHDMI OUT

Switches the HDMI OUT jacks to output HDMI signals

(page 53).

hSCENE

Switches between linked sets of input sources and sound field

programs (page 24).

iON SCREEN

Displays the GUI screen (page 25).

kExternal component operation keys

Operate recording, playback etc. of external components

(page 72).

lNumeric keys

Enter numbers.

mTV control keys

Enables operations of a TV or a projector (page 72).

nTRANSMIT

Lights up when a signal is output from the remote control.

oCODE SET

Sets remote control codes for external component operations

(page 72).

pPOWER

Switches this unit on and standby (page 20).

qSLEEP

Switches the sleep timer operations (page 53).

rSound selection keys

Selects sound field programs (page 27).

sOPTION

Displays the Option menu (page 54).

tVOLUME +/–

Adjust the volume of this unit (page 24).

uDISPLAY

Displays the play information on the video monitor.

When an iPod is connected: Changes the operation mode of the

iPod connected to the Yamaha iPod universal dock (page 44).

vMUTE

Turns the mute function on and off (page 25).

wHD Radio keys

xSub-input selection keys

Selects USB, NET RADIO, PC or Rhapsody when “USB/NET”

is selected as the input source.

HDMI 1-4 Selects HDMI inputs 1 through 4.

AV 1-6 Selects AV inputs 1 through 6.

AUDIO 1/2 Selects AUDIO inputs 1 and 2.

V-AUX

Selects a signal input from the VIDEO AUX jacks.

PHONO Selects a signal input from the PHONO jacks.

MULTI Selects a signal input from the MULTI CH

INPUT jacks.

DOCK

Selects a Yamaha iPod universal dock/Bluetooth

wireless audio receiver connected to the DOCK terminal.

TUNER Selects the FM/AM tuner.

SIRIUS Selects a SiriusConnect tuner as an input source.

XM Selects an XM tuner as an input source.

USB/NET Selects a USB device or a signal input via

network (selected by xSub-input

selection keys).

DVD TV

RADIO

SLEEPSOURCE

FM AM

INFO

MEMORY

1234

5612

PHONO

MULTI

DOCK

TUNER SIRIUS

V-AUX

HDMI

MUSIC

STEREO

ENHANCER SUR. DECODE

MOVIE

MUTE

STRAIGHT

HDMI OUT

PURE DIRECT

USB/NET

PRESET

TUN./CH

ON SCREEN OPTION

MAIN

POWER

7856

1234

USB NET RADIO PC RHAPSODY

POWER

TOP

SCENE

RETURN

REC

ENT

POWER

TV VOL

INPUT

MUTE

TV CH

ENTER

VOLUME

DISPLAY

POP-UP

CATEGORY

HDMI

AUDIO

ZONE 2

ZONE 3

TRANSMIT

CODE SET

TAG PRG SELECT

FM/AM Switches a band between FM and AM.

(CATEGORY l / h)Select a channel category for XM/

SIRIUS.

MEMORY Presets radio stations.

PRESET k / nSelects a preset station.

TUN./CH k / nChanges FM/AM frequencies or

XM/SIRIUS tuner channels.

jCursors k / n / l / hSelect menu items or change

settings.

ENTER Confirms a selected item.

RETURN Returns to the previous screen or

ends the menu display.

TAG Stores “tag” data to the iPod or internal

memory of this unit (page 33).

PRG SELECT Selects an HD Radio audio program

(page 33).

8 En

Part names and functions

Use the supplied simplified remote control to make basic controls of this unit. Keys on the simplified remote control

function as well as the identical keys on the main remote control (page 6).

Note

•Before using the simplified remote control or replacing the battery, make sure that you read “Notes on remote controls and batteries” in the “Caution”

section.

•To select an input source, press INPUT l / h repeatedly.

•The printings “TAG” and “PRG SELECT” are for U.S.A. model.

■Setting the controlling zone

Follow the procedure below to select an amplifier (main,

Zone2 or Zone3) to be operated by the simplified remote

control (page 71).

■Setting the remote control ID

Follow the procedure below to set the remote control ID of

the simplified remote control. For details about remote

control ID, see page 74.

■Replacing the battery of the simplified

remote control

Change the battery when the operation range of the

simplified remote control decreases.

Simplified remote control

Zone to select Procedure

Main Press and hold h (right of ENTER) and

BD/DVD for more than 3 seconds.

Zone2 Press and hold h (right of ENTER) and TV

for more than 3 seconds.

Zone3 Press and hold h (right of ENTER) and CD

for more than 3 seconds.

Zone to select Procedure

ID1 Press and hold l (left of ENTER) and BD/

DVD for more than 3 seconds.

ID2 Press and hold l (left of ENTER) and TV

for more than 3 seconds.

MUTE

VOLUME

INPUT

SLEEP

SCENE

DVD TV CD

RADIO

POWER

ON SCREEN OPTION

TAG

PRESET

PRG SELECT

ENTER

DISPLAYRETURN

Remove the insulation sheet

Use a straight

pin to remove

the cover.

Replace the

battery with a

new CR2025

battery.

Close the

cover.

9 En

English

INTRODUCTION

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION APPENDIX

PREPARATION

BASIC

OPERATION

ADVANCED

OPERATION

When you use this product for the first time, perform setup following the steps below. See the related pages for details on

operations and settings.

Prepare speakers, DVD player, cables, and other items

necessary for setup.

For example, prepare the following items for setting up a

7.1-channel sound system.

•The priority of the requirement of other speakers is as follows:

1 Two surround speakers

2 One center speaker

3 One (or two) surround back speaker(s)

•Video and audio cables are unnecessary if you use HDMI cables.

Place your speakers in the room and connect them to this

unit.

•This unit has a YPAO (Yamaha Parametric Room Acoustic Optimizer)

that automatically optimizes this unit based on room acoustic

characteristics (audio characteristics of the speakers, speaker positions,

and room acoustics, etc.).

You can enjoy good balanced sound without special knowledge by using

the YPAO technology (☞P. 21).

Connect your TV, DVD player, or other components.

Connect the power cable and turn on this unit.

Select the component connected in step 3 as an input

source and start playback.

•This unit supports the SCENE function (page 24) that changes the input

source and sound field program at one time. Four scenes are preset for

different purposes for Blu-ray disc, DVD and CD, and you can select

from a scene from those just by pressing a remote control key.

Quick start guide

Step 1: Prepare items for setup

Requirements qty.

Speakers Front speaker 2

Center speaker 1

Surround speaker 2

Surround back

speaker

Active subwoofer 1

Speaker cable 7

Subwoofer cable 1

Reproduction component such as DVD player 1

Video monitor such as TV 1

Video cable or HDMI cable 2

Audio cable 2

Front right speaker

Subwoofer

Surround left speaker

Surround right speaker

Front left

speaker

Video monitor

Center

speaker

Components

(such as DVD player)

Surround Back

right speaker

Surround Back

left speaker

Step 2: Set up your speakers

•Placing speakers ☞P. 10

•Connecting speakers ☞P. 11

Step 3: Connect your components

•Connecting a TV monitor or projector ☞P. 14

•Connecting other components ☞P. 16

•Connecting a multi-format player or an

external decoder ☞P. 18

•Connecting an external amplifier ☞P. 18

•Connecting a USB storage device ☞P. 19

•Connecting a Yamaha iPod universal dock or

Bluetooth wireless audio receiver ☞P. 1 8

•Connecting to the network ☞P. 19

•Connecting the FM and AM antennas ☞P. 20

•Connecting an XM Mini-Tuner Home Dock ☞P. 35

•Connecting a SiriusConnect tuner ☞P. 39

Step 4: Turn on the power

•Connecting the power cable ☞P. 20

•Turning this unit on and off ☞P. 20

Step 5: Select the input source and start

playback

•Basic procedure ☞P. 24

•Selecting sound field programs ☞P. 27

10 En

PREPARATION

This unit supports up to 7.1-channel surround. We recommend the following speaker layout in order to obtain the

optimum surround effect.

7.1-channel speaker layout

6.1-channel speaker layout

5.1-channel speaker layout

■Front left and right speakers (FL and FR)

The front speakers are used for the front channel sounds

(stereo sound) and effect sounds. Place these speakers at

an equal distance from the ideal listening position. Adjust

the height of the TV or screen so that about 1/4 of the

screen from the bottom is aligned with the tweeters of the

front speakers.

■Center speaker (C)

The center speaker is for the center channel sounds

(dialog, vocals, etc.). Place it halfway between the left and

right speakers. When using a TV, place the speaker just

above or just under the center of the TV with the front

surfaces of the TV and the speaker aligned. When using a

screen, place it just under the center of the screen.

■Surround left and right speakers (SL and SR)

The surround speakers are used for effect and surround

sounds. Place them at the rear left and rear right facing the

listening position. To obtain a natural sound flow in the

5.1-channel speaker layout, place them slightly further

back than in the 7.1-channel speaker layout.

■Surround back left and right speakers (SBL

and SBR) / Surround back speaker (SB)

The surround back left and right speakers are used for rear

effect sounds. Place them at the rear of the room facing the

listening position at least 30 cm (1 ft) away from each

other, ideally at the same distance as that between the

front left and right speakers.

In the 6.1-channel speaker layout, surround back left and

right channel sound signals are mixed down and output

from the single surround back speaker.

In the 5.1-channel speaker layout, surround back left and

right channel sound signals are output from the surround

left and right speakers.

■Subwoofer (SW)

The subwoofer speaker is used for bass sounds and low-

frequency effect (LFE) sounds included in Dolby Digital

and DTS signals. Use a subwoofer with a built-in

amplifier, such as the Yamaha Active Servo Processing

Subwoofer System. Place it exterior to the front left and

right speakers facing slightly inward to reduce reflections

from a wall.

Connections

Placing speakers

60˚

30˚

SBR

SBL

80˚

30 cm (12 in) or more

60˚

30˚

80˚

60˚

30˚

80˚

Speaker channels

11 En

English

INTRODUCTION

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION APPENDIX

PREPARATION

BASIC

OPERATION

ADVANCED

OPERATION

■Presence left and right speakers (PL and PR)

The presence speakers supplement the sound from the

front speakers with extra ambient effects produced by the

sound field programs (page 27). We recommend that you

use the presence speakers especially for the CINEMA

DSP sound field programs. To use the presence speakers,

connect the speakers to SP1 terminals and then set “Extra

Speaker Assignment” to “Presence” (page 60).

Connect your speakers to the respective terminals according to your speaker layout. The following illustration shows how

to connect speakers for 7.1-channel speaker layout.

•You can connect Zone2/3 speakers to the EXTRA SP (SP1/SP2) terminals (page 70).

•You can connect up to two subwoofers. When two subwoofers are connected, the same sound is output from them.

PRPL

0.5 to 1 m (1 to 3 ft)0.5 to 1 m (1 to 3 ft)

1.8 m

(6 ft)

1.8 m

(6 ft)

1/4 from

bottom

Connecting speakers

SUBWOOFER

SPEAKERS

FRONT

CENTER

SINGLE

CLASS 2 WIRING

SURROUND

SURROUND BACK/

BI-AMP

ZONE2/PRESENCE

SP1

NETW

ORK

R.B

INPU

DIO

OUT

URROUN

SUR

OUT

ENTER

HDMI

ENTER

cg f h i

e d

b a k j

Speakers Jacks on this unit 7.1-channel 6.1-channel 5.1-channel

aFront left FRONT (L) ✔✔✔

bFront right FRONT (R) ✔✔✔

cCenter CENTER ✔✔✔

dSurround left SURROUND (L) ✔✔✔

eSurround right SURROUND (R) ✔✔✔

fSurround back left

(Surround back for 6.1-channel)

SURROUND BACK (L)

(SINGLE) ✔✔

gSurround back right SURROUND BACK (R) ✔

hSubwoofer 1 SUBWOOFER 1 ✔✔✔

iSubwoofer 2 SUBWOOFER 2 Option Option Option

jPresence left SP1 (L) Option Option Option

kPresence right SP1 (R) Option Option Option

12 En

Connections

■Connecting speaker cables

1Remove approximately 10 mm (0.4 in) of

insulation from the end of each speaker

cable and then twist bare wires of the cable

together so that they will not cause a short

circuits.

2Loosen the knob, insert the twisted bare

wires into the hole and then tighten the knob.

■Using bi-amplification connections

If you do not connect surround back speakers, you can use

the SURROUND BACK/BI-AMP jacks to make bi-

amplification connections to one speaker system which

supports bi-amplification connection as shown below.

To activate the connections, set “BI-AMP” to “ON” in the

advanced setup menu (page 73).

Note

•You cannot use surround back speakers or extra speakers (presence and

Zone2 speakers) when bi-amplification connections are made.

Caution

•A speaker cable is a pair of insulated cables running side by side in general. One of the cables is colored differently

or striped to indicate a polarity. Connect one end of the colored/striped cable to the “+” (red) terminal of this unit

and the other end to that of your speaker, and connect one end of the other cable to the “–” (black) terminal of this

unit and the other end to that of your speaker.

•Before connecting the speakers, be sure to disconnect the power cable.

•Do not let the bare speaker wires touch each other or any metal part of this unit. This could damage this unit and/or

speakers. If the circuit shorts out, “CHECK SP WIRES!” appears on the front panel display when this unit is turned

on.

•If images on the monitor (CRT) are distorted, place the speakers away from the video monitor.

•Use speakers with an impedance of 6-ohm or larger. Set speaker impedance in the advanced setup menu before

connecting the speakers (page 73). You can also use 4-ohm speakers as the front speakers when you set “SP IMP.” to

“6ΩMIN”.

Connecting the banana plug (Except Korea,

U.K., Europe, Russia and Asia models)

Tighten the knob and then insert the banana plug into

the end of the terminal.

10 mm (0.4 in)

Red: positive (+)

Black: negative (–)

Banana plug

Caution

Before making bi-amplification connections, remove

any brackets or cables that connect a woofer with a

tweeter. Refer to the instruction manuals of speakers for

details.

When not making bi-amplification connections, make

sure that the brackets or cables are connected before

connecting the speaker cables.

SURROUND BACK/

BI-AMP

FRONT

Front speakers

Right Left

This unit

13 En

Connections

English

INTRODUCTION

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION APPENDIX

PREPARATION

BASIC

OPERATION

ADVANCED

OPERATION

This unit has the following input and output jacks. Use jacks and cables appropriate for components that you are

connecting.

■Audio jacks

■Video jacks

■Video/audio jacks

•We recommend that you use a commercially available 19-pin HDMI

cable no longer than 5 meters (16 feet) with the HDMI logo printed on it.

•Use a conversion cable (HDMI jack ↔ DVI-D jack) to connect this unit

to other DVI components.

•You can check the potential problem about the HDMI connection

(page 55).

Information on jacks and cable plugs

Jack and cables Description

Analog audio jacks To transmit conventional analog

stereo audio signals. Use stereo pin

cables.

COAXIAL jacks To transmit coaxial digital audio

signals. Use pin cables.

OPTICAL jacks To transmit optical digital audio

signals. Use optical fiber cables.

Jack and cables Description

VIDEO jacks To transmit conventional

composite video signals. Use pin

cables.

COMPONENT VIDEO

jacks

To transmit component video

signals that include luminance (Y),

chrominance blue (PB) and

chrominance red (PR) components.

Use component video cables.

(white)

(red)

COAXIAL

(orange)

OPTICAL

VIDEO

(yellow)

COMPONENT

VIDEO

(red)

(blue)

(green)

Jack and cables Description

HDMI jacks To transmit digital video and

digital audio signals. Use HDMI

cables.

HDMI

14 En

Connections

According to the types of video input jacks available on your video monitor (such as a TV or projector), choose one of

the connection methods as shown below. When you connect video players such as a DVD player to this unit with an

HDMI connection, connect your video monitor to this unit with an HDMI connection.

Note

•Make sure that this unit and other components are unplugged from the AC wall outlets.

■If your video monitor has an HDMI input jack

•This unit is equipped with two HDMI OUT jacks. You can select the

active HDMI OUT jack(s) by pressing gHDMI OUT (page 53).

•This unit supports the HDMI control function (page 53). If your TV

supports the HDMI control function, connect the TV to the HDMI OUT

1 jack to control this unit with the remote control of your TV.

■If your video monitor does not have HDMI

input jacks but component video input jacks

■If your video monitor has neither HDMI nor

component video input jacks

Connecting a TV monitor or projector

Jacks on components Jacks on this unit

aHDMI input HDMI OUT 1

bHDMI input HDMI OUT 2

HDMI OUT 2HDMI OUT 1

(HDMI CONTROL)

RIGGER OUT

UNB

AL.

HD R

adio

HDMI

(

)

DMI

DMI 3

VIDEO

.1A MAX

REM

NENT

VIDE

HDMI

Projector Jacks on components Jacks on this unit

cComponent video output MONITOR OUT

(COMPONENT VIDEO)

Jacks on components Jacks on this unit

dVideo input (composite) MONITOR OUT (VIDEO)

COMPONENT

VIDEO

RIGGER OUT

VIDE

DMI

T 2

HDMI

(

)

DMI

HDMI 3

VIDE

.1A MAX

VIDEO

ONI

OR OUT

RIGGER OUT

IDE

DMI

T 2

DMI

T 1

HD Radio

HDMI

(

BD/D

)

HDMI 2

DMI 3

0.1A MAX

REM

NENT

15 En

Connections

English

INTRODUCTION

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION APPENDIX

PREPARATION

BASIC

OPERATION

ADVANCED

OPERATION

To output sound of a TV from this unit, make connection

between one of the AV 1-6 jacks of this unit and an audio

output jack of the TV.

If the TV supports an optical digital output, we

recommend that you use the AV 1 jack. Connecting to the

AV 1 jack allows you to switch an input source to the AV 1

jack with a just a single key operation using the SCENE

function (page 24).

Outputting TV sounds from this unit

OPTICAL

(

)

V 1

XIA

V 3

(

)

AXIA

PTI

V 4

V 5

V 6

VIDE

UNB

Digital output

(optical)

16 En

Connections

This unit has input and output terminals for respective input and output sources. You can reproduce sound and movies

from input sources selected with the front panel display or remote control.

Note

•Make sure that this unit and other components are unplugged from the AC wall outlets.

■Audio and video player / Set-top box

Connecting other components

External

component Signal Output jacks on

components Input jacks on this unit

External component

with HDMI output

Audio/Video HDMI output HDMI 1 (BD/DVD)

HDMI 2

HDMI 3

HDMI 4

External component

with component video

output

Audio Optical digital output AV 1 (TV) OPTICAL

Video Component video output COMPONENT VIDEO

Audio Coaxial digital output AV 2 COAXIAL

Video Component video output COMPONENT VIDEO

External component

with composite video

output

Audio Coaxial digital output AV 3 (CD) COAXIAL

Video Composite output VIDEO

Audio Optical digital output AV 4 OPTICAL

Video Composite output VIDEO

Audio Analog audio output AV 5 Analog audio

Video Composite output VIDEO

Audio Analog audio output AV 6 Analog audio

Video Composite output VIDEO

PHONO

COMPONENT

VIDEO

OPTICAL

OUT

( TV )

AV 1

AV 2

COAXIAL

AV 3

(CD)

COAXIAL OPTICAL

AV 4 AV 5 AV 6

OUT

AUDIO1 AUDIO2

FRONT

SURROUND

SUR.BACK

SUBWOOFER

MULTI CH INPUT

AUDIO

OUT

VIDEO

HDMI 1

(BD/DVD)

HDMI 2 HDMI 3 HDMI 4

CENTER

DIGITAL

AUDIO

GND

DOCK

232

HDMI

T 2

DMI

ANTENNA

UNBAL.

HD R

adio

(

HDMI

NTR

)

IDE

NIT

OUT

MAX.

RONT

REMOTE

OMPONENT

VIDE

IRIU

GND terminal

Audio / video output (AV OUT)

Audio input (AUDIO 1/2)

HDMI input

(HDMI 1-4)

Audio output

(AUDIO OUT)

Multi channel audio input (MULTI CH INPUT)

Audio input (PHONO)

Audio output

(DIGITAL AUDIO)

Audio / video input

(AV 1-6)

17 En

Connections

English

INTRODUCTION

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION APPENDIX

PREPARATION

BASIC

OPERATION

ADVANCED

OPERATION

•Input jacks in parentheses indicate the jacks to which the SCENE function (page 24) is assigned by the initial factory settings. To use the SCENE function

with the initial factory settings, connect external components that support the SCENE function to these jacks.

•You can change the name of the input source displayed on the front panel display as necessary (page 64).

•See page 69 on how to use the ZONE2/3 OUT jacks.

•When you connect an external component with analog audio and component video (or composite) output jacks, connect the analog audio output to the

AUDIO 1 or AUDIO 2 jacks of this unit while making a video connection (component video or composite). Then select the video to be output when

“AUDIO 1” or “AUDIO 2” is selected as the input source (page 56).

■Audio player

•If your CD player has a coaxial digital output jack, connect it to the AV3 jack of this unit. In this case, you can use the SCENE function (page 24) with the

initial factory settings.

•When connecting a turntable with a low-output MC cartridge to the PHONO jacks, use an in-line boosting transformer or MC-head amplifier.

•Connect your turntable to the GND terminal of this unit to reduce noise in the signal.

■Internal signal flow

Video signal flow

This unit automatically converts input video signals and

outputs the signals to the HDMI OUT jacks and

MONITOR OUT (COMPONENT VIDEO and VIDEO)

jacks (video conversion).

Note

•The AV OUT (composite video) jack only outputs video signals input to

the composite video input jacks.

Audio signal flow

Notes

•Audio signals input to the HDMI input jacks are output from either the

speaker terminals or HDMI OUT 1/2 jacks depending on the “Audio

Output” setting (page 62).

•The DIGITAL AUDIO (OPTICAL OUT) jack outputs digital audio

signals only when signals are input to the optical or coaxial optical input

jacks and corresponding input source is selected.

External component Output jacks on

components Input jacks on this unit

External component with optical digital

output

Optical digital output AV 1 (TV) OPTICAL

AV 4 OPTICAL

External component with coaxial digital

output

Coaxial digital output AV 2 COAXIAL

AV 3 (CD) COAXIAL

External component with analog audio

output

Analog audio output AV 5 Analog audio

AV 6 Analog audio

AUDIO 1 Analog audio

AUDIO 2 Analog audio

Turntable Analog audio output PHONO Analog audio

About audio/video output jacks

When using the AV OUT jacks: connect these jacks to composite video and analog audio input jacks of an external

component.

When using the AUDIO OUT jacks: connect these jacks to analog audio input jacks of an external component.

When using the DIGITAL AUDIO (OPTICAL OUT) jack: connect this jack to optical digital input jack of an

external component.

HDMI

VIDEO

HDMI OUT

VIDEO

HDMI

Component

video

Composite

video

Input Output

HDMI

OPTICAL

HDMI OUT

OPTICAL

OUT

COAXIAL

HDMI

Optical

digital

Analog

Input Output

MULTI CH INPUT Speaker

terminals

Coaxial

digital

18 En

Connections

■Connecting a multi-format player or an

external decoder

This unit is equipped with 8 additional input jacks (Front

L/R, Center, Surround L/R, Surround Back L/R and

Subwoofer) for analog multi-channel input from a multi-

format player, external decoder, etc.

Notes

•When you select “MULTI CH” as the input source, the digital sound field

processor is automatically disabled.

•Since this unit does not redirect signals input at the MULTI CH INPUT

jacks to accommodate for missing speakers, connect at least a 5.1-

channel speaker system when using this feature.

•You can specify a video signal to be output during a multi-channel audio

reproduction (page 56). If your DVD player has analog multi-channel

output jacks, connect them to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks while making

a video connection (component video or composite).

■Connecting an external amplifier

If you want to use another amplifier, connect an external

amplifier to the PRE OUT jacks. Each PRE OUT jack

outputs the same channel signals as the corresponding

speaker terminals.

Note

•When you make connections to the PRE OUT jacks, do not make any

connections to the speaker terminals.

aFRONT PRE OUT jacks

Front channel output jacks.

bSURROUND PRE OUT jacks

Surround channel output jacks.

cSUR.BACK PRE OUT jacks

Surround back output jacks. When you only connect one

external amplifier for the surround back channel, connect it to

the left SUR.BACK (SINGLE) jack.

•To output surround back channel signals at these jacks, set

“Surround Speaker” to any parameter except “None” (page 60).

dCENTER PRE OUT jack

Center channel output jack.

eSUBWOOFER PRE OUT 1/2 jack

Connect a subwoofer with a built-in amplifier.

■Transmitting/receiving remote control signals

When the components have the capability of the

transmission of the remote control signals, connect the

REMOTE IN and REMOTE OUT jacks to the remote

control input and output jack with the monaural analog

mini cable as follows.

•If connecting a Yamaha component that supports the SCENE control

signal reception to the REMOTE OUT jack of this unit, you can start

playback on the Yamaha component by using the SCENE function

(page 24).

•If connecting a component other than Yamaha products to the REMOTE

OUT jack of this unit, set “SCENE IR” to “OFF” in the advanced setup

menu (page 73).

This unit has the DOCK terminal, to which you can

connect a Yamaha iPod universal dock (YDS-11, sold

separately) or a Bluetooth wireless audio receiver (YBA-

10, sold separately). You can play an iPod or a Bluetooth

component with this unit by connecting it to the DOCK

terminal.

FRONT

SURROUND

SUR.BACK

SUBWOOFER

MULTI CH INPUT

CENTER

LRLR RL

Surround

back out

Surround

out

Front out

Subwoofer out

Center out

Multi-format player or external decoder

(7.1-channel output)

FRONT

SURROUND

SUR. BACK SUBWOOFER

PRE OUT

CENTERSINGLE

abc d

Connecting a Yamaha iPod universal

dock or Bluetooth™ wireless audio

receiver

OUT

REMOTE

HDMI 1

DVD

)

HDMI

HDMI 4

VIDE

NIT

NEN

VIDE

Remote

control out

Remote

control in

Infrared signal

receiver or Yamaha

component

IR flasher or

Yamaha component

(CD or DVD player, etc.)

DOCK

TRI

NENT

IDE

OPTICAL

HDMI OUT 2

DMI OUT 1

ANTENNA

UNB

AL.

D R

adio

(

HDMI CONT

)

IRIU

Yamaha iPod universal dock or

Bluetooth wireless audio receiver

19 En

Connections

English

INTRODUCTION

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION APPENDIX

PREPARATION

BASIC

OPERATION

ADVANCED

OPERATION

To connect this unit to your network, plug one end of a

network cable (CAT-5 or higher straight cable) into the

NETWORK port of this unit, and plug the other end into

one of the LAN ports on your router that supports the

DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol) server

function. To enjoy Internet Radio or music files saved on

your PC, each device must be connected properly in the

network.

Note

•Use an STP (shielded twisted pair) cable (commercially available) to

connect a network hub or router and this unit.

•If the DHCP server function on your router is disabled, you need to

configure the network settings manually (page 64).

Connect a USB memory device or USB portable audio

player to the USB port on the front panel of this unit. For

information about USB storage devices supported by this

unit, see page 47.

Use either the HDMI IN jack or analog AUDIO/VIDEO

jacks on the front panel to connect a game console,

camcorder or digital camera to this unit. Be sure to turn

down the volume of this unit and other components before

making connections.

Note

•When signals are input to the HDMI IN and analog input jacks (AUDIO

L/R and VIDEO) at the same time, the HDMI connection has a priority.

Note

•To protect against dust, attach the supplied VIDEO AUX input cover to

the VIDEO AUX jacks when you do not use the jacks. To remove the

cover, push the right section of it.

Connecting to the network

Connecting a USB storage device

NETWORK

OUT

HDMI 1

(

)

HDMI

HDMI 4

NIT

OUT

.1A MAX.

REM

COMPONEN

LAN

WAN

Network cable

Modem

Router

Internet

ON/OFF

PHONES

MAIN ZONE

SILENT CINEMA

TONE CONTROL

PROGRAM

STRAIGHT PURE DIRECT

EFFECT

BD/DVD

RADIO

SCENE

USB

MAIN

ILENT

INEMA

NTR

GRAM

TRAI

URE DIRE

FFE

RADI

CEN

USB

USB memory device or

USB portable audio player

Using the VIDEO AUX jacks

STRAIGHT PURE DIRECT

INPUT

OPTIMIZER MIC

VIDEO

HDMI IN

AUDIO

VIDEO

AUX

EFFECT

D/DVD

RADIO

SCENE

STRAIGHT

URE DIREC

INP

OPTIMIZER MI

FFE

ADI

ENE

AUDIO

VIDEO

HDMI IN

HDMI

Game console, camcorder

or digital camera

Analog audio

output

Video output

HDMI output

INPUT

OPTIMIZER MIC

VIDEO

HDMI IN

AUDIO

VIDEO

AUX

VOLUME

BAND

CATEGORY

TUNING/CH

PUSH

Atlach the cover

INPUT

OPTIMIZER MIC

VIDEO

HDMI IN

AUDIO

VIDEO

AUX

VOLUME

BAND

CATEGORY

TUNING/CH

PUSH

Remove the cover

20 En

Connections

An indoor FM antenna and an AM loop antenna are

supplied with this unit. Connect these antennas properly to

the respective jacks.

•The supplied antennas are normally sensitive enough to obtain good

reception.

•Position the AM loop antenna away from this unit.

•If you cannot get good reception, we recommend that you use an outdoor

antenna. For details, consult the nearest authorized Yamaha dealer or

service center.

•Always use the AM loop antenna even when the outdoor antenna is

connected.

Assembling the AM loop antenna

Connecting the AM loop antenna

The wires of the AM loop antenna have no polarity. You

can connect either wire to the AM terminal and the other

to the GND terminal.

After all connections are complete, plug the supplied

power cable into the AC inlet and then plug it into an AC

wall outlet.

1Press LMAIN ZONE ON/OFF on the front

panel (or pPOWER on the remote control)

to turn on this unit.

2Press LMAIN ZONE ON/OFF (or

pPOWER) again to turn off this unit

(standby mode).

•The unit needs a few seconds until ready to play back.

•You can also turn on this unit by pressing RSCENE (or hSCENE).

•This unit consumes a small amount of electricity even in the standby

mode. We recommend disconnecting the power cable from the AC wall

outlet.

Connecting the FM and AM antennas

ANTENNA

UNBAL.

HD Radio

GND

NEN

VIDE

PTI

IDE

(

)

(

DMI

NTR

)

VIDE

OUT

NIT

NENT

IDE

ITAL

AUDI

Ground (GND terminal)

The GND terminal is for noise reduction.

Indoor FM antenna AM loop

antenna

Press and hold ReleaseInsert

Connecting the power cable

Turning this unit on and off

Caution

Do not unplug this unit while it is turned on. Doing so

may damage this unit or cause the settings of this unit

to be saved incorrectly.

AC IN

To the AC wall outlet

21 En

English

INTRODUCTION

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION APPENDIX

PREPARATION

BASIC

OPERATION

ADVANCED

OPERATION

This unit has a Yamaha Parametric Acoustic Optimizer (YPAO). With the YPAO, this unit automatically adjusts the

output characteristics of your speakers based on speaker position, speaker performance, and the acoustic characteristics

of the room. We recommend that you first adjust the output characteristics with the YPAO when you use this unit.

1Check the following points.

Before starting the automatic setup, check the

following.

•All speakers and subwoofer are connected

properly.

•Headphones are disconnected from this unit.

•The video monitor is connected properly.

•This unit and the video monitor are turned on.

•This unit is selected as the video input source of the

video monitor.

•The connected subwoofer is turned on and the

volume level is set to about half way (or slightly

less).

•The crossover frequency controls of the connected

subwoofer are set to the maximum.

2Connect the supplied optimizer microphone

to the UOPTIMIZER MIC jack on the front

panel.

“MIC ON. View GUI MENU” appears on the front panel

display.

The GUI screen appears on the video monitor.

•You can bring up the above menu screen from the Setup menu (page 59).

3Place the optimizer microphone at your

normal listening position on a flat level

surface with the omni-directional

microphone heading upward.

•It is recommended that you use a tripod or something similar to fix the

optimizer microphone at the same height as your ears would be when

seated in your listening position. You can fix the optimizer microphone to

the tripod with the attaching screw of the tripod.

Optimizing the speaker setting for your listening room (YPAO)

Caution

•Be advised that it is normal for loud test tones to be

output during the “Auto Setup” procedure. Do not

allow small children to enter the room during the

procedure.

•To achieve the best results, make sure the room is as

quiet as possible while the “Auto Setup” procedure is

in progress. If there is too much ambient noise, the

results may not be satisfactory.

•You can manually adjust the output characteristics of your speakers

with “Manual Setup” in the Setup menu (page 59).

Using Auto Setup

VOLUME

MIN MAX

CROSSOVER/

HIGH CUT

MIN MAX

Subwoofer

INPUT

IDE

HDMI I

IDE

OPTIMIZER MIC

Optimizer microphone

Auto Setup

Extra Speaker Assignment

Zone2+Zone3Zone2

None

Presence

FrontFlat Natural

EQ Type

Move focus

Start

Optimizer microphone

22 En

Optimizing the speaker setting for your listening room (YPAO)

4When the speakers are connected to EXTRA

SP terminals, press jCursor k repeatedly

to select “Extra Speaker Assignment” and

then press jCursor l / h to select how to

use EXTRA SP terminals from “Zone2”,

“Zone2+Zone3”, “Presence” or “None”.

If this unit does not work when you press jCursor,

press iON SCREEN once and then operate this

unit.

5To select sound characteristics for

adjustment, press jCursor n to select “EQ

Type” and then press jCursor l / h.

If this unit does not work when you press jCursor,

press iON SCREEN once and then operate this

unit.

This unit has a parametric equalizer that adjusts the

output levels for each frequency range. The equalizer

is adjusted to produce a cohesive sound field based on

automatically measured speaker characteristics.

In “EQ Type”, you can select the following

parametric equalizer characteristics suitable for the

desired sound characteristics.

Flat

This adjusts each speaker to obtain the same

characteristics. Select this if your speakers have

similar qualities.

Front

This adjusts each speaker to obtain the same

characteristics as the front left and right speakers.

Select this if your front left and right speakers have

significantly better qualities than the other speakers.

Natural

This adjusts all speakers to achieve natural sound.

Select this if sounds in the high frequency range seem

too strong when “EQ Type” is set to “Flat”.

6Press jCursor n to select “Start” and then

press jENTER to start the setup procedure.

A countdown starts and a measurement starts in 10

seconds. A loud test tone is output during

measurement.

Notes

•During the automatic setup procedure, do not perform any

operation on this unit.

•Press jCursor k to cancel the automatic setup procedure.

When measurement is successfully completed,

“YPAO Complete” appears on the front panel display

and the measurement result appears on the GUI

screen.

Speaker Config

Displays the number of speakers connected to this unit in

the following order:

Total of Front and Center/Total of Surround and Surround

Back/Subwoofer

Distance (Min / Max)

Displays the speaker distance from the listening position

in the following order:

Closest speaker distance/Farthest speaker distance

Level (Min / Max)

Displays the speaker output levels in the following order:

Lowest speaker output level/Highest speaker output level

Notes

•If “Error” appears on the GUI screen during “Auto Setup”, measurement

is canceled and the type of error is displayed. For details, see “When an

error message is displayed during measurement” (page 23).

•If problems occur during measurement, “Check xx warning(s)” (xx

indicates the number of warnings) appears in red. For details, see “When

a warning message is displayed after measurement” (page 23).

7Press jENTER to confirm the settings.

To cancel the operation, press jCursor l / h to

select “Cancel” and press jENTER.

The speaker characteristics are adjusted according to

measurement results.

When the following screen appears, remove the

optimizer microphone. “Auto Setup” is now

complete.

•If you do not want to apply the measurement results, select “Cancel”.

•Perform “Auto Setup” again if you change the number or positions of

speakers.

Measurement takes about 3 minutes. To obtain precise

results, stay where you will not disturb the

measurement, such as to the side of or behind the

speakers or outside the room.

The optimizer microphone is sensitive to heat. Store it

in a cool place and away from direct sunlight after

measurement. Do not leave it in a place where it will be

subjected to high temperatures such on an AV

component.

3 /4 / 0.1

8.0ft / 8.5ft

-3.5dB / +4.5dB

Auto Setup

Speaker Config :

Distance (Min / Max) :

Level (Min / Max) :

Result

Set Cancel

Finish

Select items

Auto Setup

Please disconnect the micorphone

(Then this screen will automatically disappear)

Return

Auto Setup Completed !

23 En

Optimizing the speaker setting for your listening room (YPAO)

English

INTRODUCTION

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION APPENDIX

PREPARATION

BASIC

OPERATION

ADVANCED

OPERATION

If an error is detected during measurement, the

measurement is canceled and “Error” appears on the GUI

screen. Check the error and solve the problem. For details

on each error message, see page 86.

Press jCursor n once, press jCursor l / h

to select “Retry” or “Exit” and then press

jENTER.

Retry

Performs “Auto Setup” again.

Exit

Terminates the measurement and “Auto Setup”.

•When “E-5:NOISY” appears, you can continue measurement. To

continue measurement, select “Proceed”. However, we recommend that

you solve the problem first and then perform measurement again.

If a problem occurs during measurement, “Check xx

warning(s)” appears on the GUI screen. Check the

warning and solve the problem. For details on each

warning message, see page 87.

•Optimization will not be performed while a warning message is

displayed. We recommend that you solve the problem and perform “Auto

Setup” again.

1Press jCursor n / k to select “Check xx

warning(s)” and then press jENTER.

Details of the warning message are displayed. If there

are multiple warning messages, you can display the

next message using jCursor h.

2To return to the top result display, press

jENTER again.

When an error message is displayed

during measurement

When a warning message is displayed

after measurement

Error

FrontL/R channel signals are not detected.

Check wiring and connections of the front L/R speakers.

Move focus

E-1 : No Front Speakers

Retry Exit

3 /4 / 0.1

8.0ft / 8.5ft

-3.5dB / +4.5dB

Auto Setup

Speaker Config :

Distance (Min / Max) :

Level (Min / Max) :

Result

Set Cancel

See details

Select items

Check 2 warnings

24 En

BASIC OPERATION

1Turn on external components (TV, DVD

player, etc.) connected to this unit.

2Rotate the TINPUT selector (or press

dInput selection key) to select an input

source.

If you press dUSB/NET on the remote control,

press xSub-input selection key to select a

sub-input source.

The name of the selected input source is displayed for

a few seconds.

•If you connect two video monitors to the HDMI OUT jacks of this

unit, press gHDMI OUT repeatedly to select the active video

monitor(s) (page 53).

•You can also select an input source from the GUI screen (page 25).

•You can change the input source name displayed on the front panel

display or GUI screen as necessary (page 64).

3Play the external component that you have

selected as the source input, or select a radio

station on the tuner.

Refer to the operating instructions of the external

component for details on playback. For selecting

radio stations or playback of an iPod, Bluetooth

component, USB storage device or network contents

using this unit, see the following.

•FM/AM radio tuning (page 31)

•iPod playback (page 44)

•Bluetooth component playback (page 46)

•USB storage device playback (page 47)

•Internet Radio playback (page 50)

•PC playback (page 48)

•Rhapsody® playback (page 51)

4Turn the KVOLUME control (or press

tVOLUME +/–) to adjust the volume.

This unit has a SCENE function that allows you to change

input sources and sound field programs with one key. Four

scenes are available for different usages, such as playing

movies or music. The following input sources and sound

field programs are provided as the initial factory settings.

•When this unit is on standby, you can turn on this unit by pressing

RSCENE (or hSCENE).

•If you connect a Yamaha DVD/CD player that has the capability of the

SCENE control signals to the REMOTE OUT jack of this unit, you can

start playback on the player by using the SCENE function.

Press RSCENE (or hSCENE).

•You can also select a SCENE from the GUI screen (page 25).

Select the desired input source/sound field

program and then press and hold RSCENE (or

hSCENE) to edit until “SET Complete” appears

on the front panel display.

•If you change the input source setting, register the remote control code of

an external component to the input source (page 72).

Playback

Basic procedure

VOL.

AV1

Input source name

VOL.

SL SR

Volume-18.5dB

Volu me

Note

When you play back a DTS-CD, noise may be output in some

conditions, which may cause a speaker malfunction. Make sure

that the volume is set to low before starting playback. If noise is

output, do the following.

1) When only noise is output

If a DTS bitstream signal is not properly input to this unit,

only noise is output. Connect the playback component to this

unit by digital connection and play back the DTS-CD. If the

condition is not improved, the problem may results from the

playback component. Consult the manufacturer of the

playback component.

2) When noise is output during playback or skip operation

Before playing back the DTS-CD, display the Option menu

after selecting the input source and set “Decoder Mode” to

“DTS” (page 54).

Using the SCENE function

Keys Input source Sound field program

BD/DVD HDMI 1 Straight

TV AV 1 Straight

CD AV 3 Straight

RADIO TUNER 7ch Enhancer

Selecting a SCENE

Registering input source/sound field

program to SCENE

25 En

Playback

English

INTRODUCTION

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION APPENDIX

PREPARATION

BASIC

OPERATION

ADVANCED

OPERATION

You can operate an external component with the remote

control of this unit by setting a remote control code for the

external component for each input source. Setting remote

control codes for desired input sources allows you to

switch between external components linked to scene

selections.

1Register the remote control code of an

external component to the desired input

source (page 72).

Note

•This feature is not available for TUNER, SIRIUS and XM input

sources.

2While holding down the desired hSCENE

key, press and hold the dInput selection

key to which you registered a remote control

code in step 1.

From now on the external component can be remotely

controllable just by selecting a scene.

1Press iON SCREEN on the remote control.

The GUI screen appears on the video monitor.

2Use jCursor k / n repeatedly to switch the

page and jCursor l / h repeatedly to

select the desired source.

•If an input source you want to select is available in “Select Scene”, you

can select the desired input source and sound field program at once.

3Press jENTER.

1Press vMUTE on the remote control to mute

the audio output.

2Press vMUTE again to resume audio

output.

You can adjust the balance of the high frequency range

(Treble) and low frequency range (Bass) of sounds output

from the front left and right speakers to obtain desired

tone.

1Press OTONE CONTROL on the front panel

repeatedly to select “Treble” or “Bass”.

2Rotate the PPROGRAM selector to adjust

the frequency range.

Control range: –10.0 dB to +10.0 dB

The display returns to the previous screen

automatically in few seconds.

Note

•The tone control settings are not effective when this unit is in the Pure

Direct mode or “MULTI CH” is selected as an input source.

Use Pure Direct mode to enjoy the pure high fidelity

sound of the selected source. When Pure Direct mode is

activated, this unit plays back the selected source with the

least circuitry.

Press SPURE DIRECT (or rPURE DIRECT)

to turn the Pure Direct mode on or off.

SPURE DIRECT lights up when you set Pure Direct

mode on.

The following features are disabled in the Pure Direct

mode.

–sound field program, tone control

–display and operation of the Option menu and Setup

–multi-zone function

•The font panel display automatically turns off while this unit in the Pure

Direct mode.

Switching remotely controlled external

components linked to scene selections

Selecting a source on the GUI screen

Category Source

Select Scene BD/DVD, TV, CD, RADIO

Select Input HDMI1-4, V-AUX, PHONO, MULTI CH,

DOCK, AV1-6, AUDIO1/2, USB, NET

RADIO, PC, Rhapsody, TUNER, SIRIUS, XM

Select Scene

BD/DVD TV CD RADIO

Muting audio output

Adjusting high/low frequency sounds

(tone control)

Enjoying pure hi-fi sound

Treble

0.0dB

26 En

Playback

Plug your headphones in the MPHONES jack on

the front panel.

When you select a sound field program while using the

headphones, the mode is automatically set to SILENT

CINEMA mode.

Notes

•When you connect headphones, no signals are output at the speaker

terminals.

•When multi-channel signals are processed, sounds in all channels are

divided to left and right channels. When “MULTI CH” is selected as the

input source, only front L/R sounds are output from the headphones.

Press EINFO (or fINFO) repeatedly.

Available information differs depending on the selected

input source.

For example, if you select HDMI1 input and display “DSP

Program”, the following screen appears on the front panel

display.

Note

•Information marked with “*” is not available when analog HD Radio

station is selected.

Using your headphones

Changing information on the front

panel display

Input source Information

HDMI1-4

AV1-6

AUDIO1/2

V-AUX

PHONO

iPod (DOCK) (simple

remote mode)

BLUETOOTH (DOCK)

Input

DSP Program

Audio Decoder

MULTI CH Input

TUNER Frequency, DSP Program, Audio

Decoder

(for HD Radio information)

Call Sign*, Category*, Artist /

Song*, Album*, Tag Info, DSP

Program, Audio Decoder, Frequency

SIRIUS Channel, Category, Artist / Song,

Composer, Antenna, DSP Program,

Audio Decoder

XM Channel, Category, Artist / Song,

Antenna, DSP Program, Audio

Decoder

Straight

Input source

Sound field program

iPod (DOCK) (menu

browse mode)

USB (USB/NET)

PC (USB/NET)

(on play information display)

DSP Program, Audio Decoder,

Song, Artist, Album

(on GUI screen)

List

Rhapsody (USB/NET) (on play information screen)

DSP Program, Audio Decoder,

Song, Artist (or Artist / Channel if

channel name is available), Album

(on GUI screen)

List

NET RADIO (USB/NET) (on play information display)

DSP Program, Audio Decoder,

Station Name

(on GUI screen)

List

Input source Information

27 En

English

INTRODUCTION

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION APPENDIX

PREPARATION

BASIC

OPERATION

ADVANCED

OPERATION

This unit is also equipped with a Yamaha digital sound field processing (DSP) chip. You can enjoy multi-channel sounds

for almost all input sources using various sound field programs stored on the chip and a variety of surround decoders.

■Selecting a sound field program on the front panel

Rotate the PPROGRAM selector to select a desired sound field program.

■Selecting a sound field program with the remote control

Perform the following operations depending on the category of the sound field programs.

Sound field programs for movies/TV programs............................... Press rMOVIE repeatedly.

Sound field programs for music ....................................................... Press rMUSIC repeatedly.

Stereo reproduction .......................................................................... Press rSTEREO repeatedly.

Multi-channel stereo reproduction ................................................... Press rSTEREO repeatedly.

Compressed music enhancer ............................................................ Press rSTEREO repeatedly.

Surround decoder ............................................................................. Press rSUR.DECODE repeatedly.

For example, if you select “Sci-Fi”, the following screen appears on the front panel display.

Notes

•Sound field programs are stored for each input source. When you change the input source, the sound field program previously selected for that input

source is applied again.

•When you play back DTS Express sources or audio signals with sampling frequency of higher than 96 kHz, the straight decode mode (page 30) is

automatically selected.

•When you play back Dolby TrueHD sources with CINEMA DSP, another program may be automatically selected in specific cases.

•When you play back DTS-HD sources with CINEMA DSP, the DTS decoder is automatically selected.

This unit provides sound field programs for multiple categories including music, movies and stereo reproduction. Select

a sound field program based on your listening preference, not merely on the name of the program, etc.

•You can check what speakers are currently outputting signals with the speaker indicators on the front panel display (page 6).

•Each program can adjust sound field elements (sound field parameters). For details, see page 65.

• in the table indicates the sound field program with CINEMA DSP (page 91).

Enjoying the sound field programs

Selecting sound field programs

Sound field program descriptions

For movie/TV program sources (MOVIE)

Program Descriptions

Standard This program creates a sound field emphasizing the surrounding feeling without disturbing the original acoustic

positioning of multi-channel audio such as Dolby Digital and DTS. It has been designed with the concept of “an

ideal movie theater”, in which the audience is surrounded by beautiful reverberations from the left, right and rear.

Spectacle This program represents the spectacular feeling of large-scale movie productions.

It reproduces a broad theater sound field matching the cinemascope and wider-screen movies with an excellent

dynamic range from very small to extremely large sound.

Sci-Fi This program clearly reproduces the finely elaborated sound design of the latest science fiction and special effects-

featuring movies. You can enjoy a variety of cinematographically created virtual spaces reproduced with clear

separation between dialog, sound effects and background music.

Adventure This program is ideal for precisely reproducing the sound design of action and adventure movies.

The sound field restrains reverberations but puts emphasis on reproducing a powerful space expanded widely to

the left and right. The reproduced depth is also restrained relatively to ensure the separation between audio

channels and the clarity of the sound.

Sci-Fi

Program name

Sound field program category

28 En

Enjoying the sound field programs

•When multi-channel signals are input, they are downmixed to 2 channels and output from the front left and right speakers.

Drama This sound field features stable reverberations that match a wide range of movie genres from serious dramas to

musicals and comedies. The reverberations are modest but offer an optimum 3D feeling, reproducing effects tones

and background music softly but cubically around clear words and center positioning in a way that does not fatigue

the listener even after long hours of viewing.

Mono Movie This program is provided for reproducing monaural video sources such as a classic movie in an atmosphere of a

good old movie theater. The program produces the optimum expansion and reverberation to the original audio to

create a comfortable space with a certain sound depth.

Sports This program allows the listeners to enjoy stereo sport broadcasts and studio variety programs with enriched live

feeling. In sports broadcasts, the voices of the commentator and sportscaster are positioned clearly at the center

while the atmosphere of the stadium expands in an optimum space to offer the listeners with a feeling of presence

in the stadium.

Action Game This sound field has been suitable for action games such as car racing and FPS games. It uses the reflection data

that limits the effects range per channel in order to offer a powerful playing environment with a being-there feeling

by enhancing various effects tones while maintaining a clear sense of directions.

Roleplaying Game This sound field has been suitable for role-playing and adventure games. It combines the sound field effects for

movies and the sound field designs for “Action Game” to represent the depth and 3D feeling of the field during

play, while offering movie-like surround effects in the movie scenes in the game.

For audio music sources (MUSIC)

Program Descriptions

Hall in Munich This sound field simulates a concert hall with approximately 2500 seats in Munich, using stylish wood for the

interior finishing as normal standards for European concert halls. Fine, beautiful reverberations spread richly,

creating a calming atmosphere. The listener’s virtual seat is at the center left of the arena.

Hall in Vienna This is an approximately 1700-seated, middle-sized concert hall with a shoebox shape that is traditional in Vienna.

Pillars and ornate carvings create extremely complex reflections from all around the audience, producing a very

full, rich sound.

Chamber This program creates a relatively wide space with a high ceiling like an audience hall in a palace. It offers pleasant

reverberations that are suitable for courtly music and chamber music.

Cellar Club This program simulates a live house with a low ceiling and homey atmosphere. A realistic, live sound field

features powerful sound as if the listener is in a row in front of a small stage.

The Roxy Theatre This is the sound field of a rock music live house in Los Angeles, with approximately 460 seats. The listener’s

virtual seat is at the center left of the hall.

The Bottom Line This is the sound field at stage front in The Bottom Line, that was a famous New York jazz club once. The floor

can seat 300 people to the left and right in a sound field offering real and vibrant sound.

Music Video This sound field offers an image of a concert hall for live performance of pop, rock and jazz music. The listener

can indulge oneself in a hot live space thanks to the presence sound field that emphasizes the vividness of vocals

and solo play and the beat of rhythm instruments, and to the surround sound field that reproduces the space of a

big live hall.

For stereo reproduction (STEREO)

Program Descriptions

2ch Stereo Use this program to mix down multi-channel sources to 2 channels.

Program Descriptions

29 En

Enjoying the sound field programs

English

INTRODUCTION

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION APPENDIX

PREPARATION

BASIC

OPERATION

ADVANCED

OPERATION

Select this program to playback sources with selected decoders. You can playback 2-channel sources on multi-channels.

•An input source is played back in straight decode mode (page 30) when “MULTI CH” is selected as the input source.

For multi-channel stereo reproduction (STEREO)

Program Descriptions

7ch Stereo Use this program to output sound from all speakers. When you play back multi-channel sources, this unit

downmixes the source to 2 channels and then outputs the sound from all speakers. This program creates a larger

sound field and is ideal for background music at parties, etc.

Compressed Music Enhancer (ENHANCER)

Program Descriptions

Straight Enhancer Use this program to enhance the sound nearest to the original depth and width of the 2-channel or multi-channel

compression artifacts.

7ch Enhancer Use this program to play back compression artifacts in 7-channel stereo.

Surround decode mode (SUR. DECODE)

Decoder Descriptions

Pro Logic Dolby Pro Logic decoder suitable for all kinds of sources.

PLIIx Movie /

PLII Movie

Dolby Pro Logic IIx (or Dolby Pro Logic II) decoder suitable for movies. If your listening environment is as

follows, you cannot select the Dolby Pro Logic IIx decoder.

•When the surround back speakers are not connected

•When headphones are connected

PLIIx Music /

PLII Music

Dolby Pro Logic IIx (or Dolby Pro Logic II) decoder suitable for music. If your listening environment is as

follows, you cannot select the Dolby Pro Logic IIx decoder.

•When the surround back speakers are not connected

•When headphones are connected

PLIIx Game /

PLII Game

Dolby Pro Logic IIx (or Dolby Pro Logic II) decoder suitable for games. If your listening environment is as

follows, you cannot select the Dolby Pro Logic IIx decoder.

•When the surround back speakers are not connected

•When headphones are connected

Neo:6 Cinema DTS decoder suitable for movies.

Neo:6 Music DTS decoder suitable for music.

Neural Sur.

(U.S.A. model only)

Neural Surround processing for any sources.

The Neural Surround decoder supports PCM (sampling rate of 96 kHz or lower), Dolby Digital, DTS Digital

Surround (except for DTS 96/24), DSD and analog 2-channel input sources. When Neural Surround-incompatible

signals are being input while the Neural Surround decoder is selected, multi-channel sources are decoded straight

into the appropriate channels without any additional effect processing and the Neural Surround-incompatible PCM

signals are reproduced in stereo. The Neural Surround decoder is especially suitable for the XM HD Surround

program of XM Satellite Radio.

30 En

Enjoying the sound field programs

In straight decode mode, sounds are reproduced without

sound field effect. 2-channel stereo sources are output

from only the front left and right speakers. Multi-channel

input sources are decoded straight into the appropriate

channels and multi-channel sounds are reproduced

without a sound field effect.

1To enable straight decode mode, press

QSTRAIGHT (or rSTRAIGHT).

“Straight” appears on the front panel display.

2To cancel straight decode mode, press

QSTRAIGHT (or rSTRAIGHT) again.

A sound field program name appears on the front

panel display, and sound is reproduced with that

sound field effect.

Virtual CINEMA DSP allows you to enjoy DSP sound

field surround effects even without any surround speakers

by using virtual surround speakers. You can even enjoy

Virtual CINEMA DSP using a minimal two-speaker

system that does not include a center speaker.

When “Surround Speaker” in the Setup menu is set to

“None” (page 60), this unit operates in Virtual CINEMA

DSP mode.

Note

•Virtual CINEMA DSP is not available in the following conditions even if

you set “Surround Speaker” to “None” (page 60).

–headphone plug is connected to the PHONES jack.

–7ch Stereo of the field sound program is selected.

–Pure Direct mode or straight decode mode is used.

SILENT CINEMA allows you to enjoy multi-channel

sources with your headphones. SILENT CINEMA mode

is automatically selected when you connect the headphone

plug to the PHONES jack.

Note

•SILENT CINEMA mode is not available in the following conditions.

–2ch Stereo of the sound field program is selected.

–Pure Direct mode or straight decode mode is selected.

CINEMA DSP 3D mode creates the intensive and

accurate stereoscopic sound field in the listening room.

To use this unit in CINEMA DSP 3D mode, presence

speakers are required. Connect the presence speakers to

the SP1 terminals, perform the following settings and then

select a CINEMA DSP related sound field program.

•Disconnect the headphones from the PHONES jack.

•Set “Extra Speaker Assignment” to “Presence”

(page 60).

•Set “3D DSP” to “On” (page 66).

When the sound field program runs in CINEMA DSP 3D

mode, the 3D indicator on the front panel display lights

up.

Enjoying unprocessed input sources

(Straight decode mode)

Enjoying sound field programs without

surround speakers (Virtual CINEMA

DSP)

Enjoy sound field programs with

headphones (SILENT CINEMA™)

Using CINEMA DSP 3D mode

31 En

English

INTRODUCTION

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION APPENDIX

PREPARATION

BASIC

OPERATION

ADVANCED

OPERATION

The FM/AM tuner of this unit provides the following two

modes for tuning.

■Frequency tuning mode

You can tune in to a desired FM/AM station by searching

or specifying its frequency.

■Preset tuning mode

You can preset the frequencies of FM/AM stations by

registering them to specific numbers, and later just select

those numbers to tune in.

Note

•Adjust the FM/AM antennas connected to this unit for the best reception.

1Rotate the TINPUT selector (or press

dTUNER) to select “TUNER” as the input

source.

2Press HBAND (or eFM or eAM) to select a

band.

3Press ITUNING/CH l / h (or eTUN./CH

k / n) to specify the frequency.

The TUNED indicator on the front panel display

lights up when the tuner is tuned in to a station. The

STEREO indicator also lights up if the program being

broadcasted is in stereo.

The frequency changes in the following manner according

to how you press ITUNING/CH l / h (or eTUN./

CH k / n).

When you press the key more than 1 second

The tuner searches the frequency of a station that is

detectable around the current frequency. This is effective

when the tuner can receive strong signals without any

interference. Once the search starts, release the key.

When you keep holding the key, the search continues even

when a station is detected. This is useful when you want to

tune in to a specific station.

When you press and release the key

The tuner increases or decreases the frequency in steps.

Use this method when the tuner cannot receive strong

signals and stations are skipped during the search.

•You can switch between stereo and monaural for FM broadcast in the

Option menu (page 55).

•(U.S.A. model only)

When tuning in to an HD Radio station, the HD indicator lights up. See

page 33 for details about the HD Radio features.

4To tune in by direct frequency tuning, press

lNumeric keys to enter the frequency of

the station.

Enter only integers. For example, if you want to set

the frequency to 88.9 MHz, enter “889”.

Notes

•When you press lNumeric keys during preset tuning, a

preset number is selected. Set tuning mode to frequency tuning

mode using ITUNING/CH l / h (or eTUN./CH k / n)

prior to the operation.

•“Wrong Station!” appears on the front panel display when you

enter a frequency that is out of receivable range. Make sure that the

entered frequency is correct.

You can register up to 40 FM/AM stations (Preset).

The tuner automatically detects FM stations with strong

signals and registers up to 40 stations. To register AM

stations, use manual station preset.

(U.S.A. model only)

You can register up to 40 FM HD Radio, AM HD Radio

and analog FM radio stations with strong signals.

Note

•(U.S.A. model only)

If you register an FM HD Radio station with this feature, only the main

audio program of the station (HD1) will be stored. To store other audio

program, preset the station manually.

1Rotate the TINPUT selector (or press

dTUNER) to select “TUNER” as the input

source.

2Press sOPTION on the remote control.

The Option menu for “TUNER” is displayed

(page 54).

3Select “Auto Preset” and then press

jENTER.

Automatic station preset starts about 5 seconds later

from the lowest frequency upwards.

FM/AM tuning

Tuning in to the desired FM/AM station

(Frequency tuning)

STEREO

TUNED

FM92.5MHz

Registering FM/AM stations and

tuning in (Preset tuning)

Registering stations by automatic station

preset

Auto Preset

32 En

FM/AM tuning

•You can select the preset number at which the preset starts by

pressing ePRESET k / n or jCursor k / n while “READY”

is displayed on the front panel display.

•To cancel registration, press jRETURN.

During the automatic station preset, “MEMORY”

appears in the front panel display each time a station

is registered.

When registration is complete, “FINISH” appears

and then the display returns to the Option menu.

To return the display to the original state, press

sOPTION.

You can manually register FM stations with weak signals

or AM stations.

1Tune in to the desired station (page 31).

•(U.S.A. model only)

To register a sub-audio program of the HD Radio station (HD2 to

HD8), press wPRG SELECT to select the desired audio

program.

2Press GMEMORY (or eMEMORY).

“Manual Preset” appears on the front panel display,

followed soon by the preset number to which the

station will be registered.

•By holding down GMEMORY (or eMEMORY) for more than

2 seconds, you can skip the following steps and automatically

lastly-registered preset number).

3Press FPRESET l / h (or ePRESET k / n)

to select the preset number to which the

station will be registered.

When you select a preset number to which no station

is registered, “Empty” appears. When you select a

preset number to which any station has been already

registered, the frequency of the station is displayed.

•You can also select a preset number using the lNumeric

keys.

4Press GMEMORY (or eMEMORY).

When registration is complete, the display returns to

the original state.

•To cancel registration, press jRETURN or leave this unit

without any operations for about 30 seconds.

You can call preset stations registered by automatic station

preset or manual station preset.

Press FPRESET l / h (or ePRESET k / n) to

select a preset number.

•Preset numbers to which no stations are registered are skipped.

•“No Presets” or “No Presets in Memory” is displayed if no stations are

registered.

•You can directly select a preset number by pressing lNumeric keys

while calling a preset station. “Empty” appears on the display if you

enter a preset number to which no station is registered. “Wrong Num.”

appears if you enter an invalid number.

•When you press lNumeric keys during normal tuning, a frequency

is entered. Set tuning mode to preset tuning mode using FPRESET l

/ h (or ePRESET k / n) prior to the operation.

•(U.S.A. model only)

This unit may take a little time to call a sub-audio program of an HD

Radio station.

1Rotate the TINPUT selector (or press

dTUNER) to select “TUNER” as the input

source.

2Press sOPTION on the remote control.

The Option menu for “TUNER” is displayed

(page 54).

3Press jCursor k / n to select “Clear Preset”

and then press jENTER.

•To cancel the operation and return to the Option menu, press

jRETURN.

4Press jCursor k / n to select a preset

number to reset and then press jENTER.

The preset station registered to the selected preset

number is cleared. To clear the registration of

multiple preset numbers, repeat step 4.

5To exit the Option menu, press sOPTION.

Registering stations by manual station

preset

01:FM87.5MHz

Preset number Frequency

Status

01:Empty

Flashes

Frequency to be registered

Preset

number

Calling a preset station (Preset tuning)

Clearing preset stations

01:FM92.5MHz

Preset number

33 En

English

INTRODUCTION

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION APPENDIX

PREPARATION

BASIC

OPERATION

ADVANCED

OPERATION

HD Radio technology is a new technology that enables FM and AM radio stations to broadcast programs digitally.

Digital broadcasting provides listeners with radically improved audio quality and reception as well as new data services.

Furthermore, supplemental program services allow listeners to select from up to 8 HD Radio programs multicast on a

single FM HD Radio channel. For further information on HD Radio technology, visit “http://www.hdradio.com/”.

This unit is equipped with an HD Radio reception feature, facilitating CD quality FM broadcasts as well as analog FM

stereo quality AM broadcasts. In addition, this unit can receive both audio and data (such as song titles, artist names,

program types, and comments) from all HD Radio programs (HD1 to HD8).

Notes

•The tuning method for HD Radio stations are same as analog FM/AM radio stations; however, you only tune into the analog part of a hybrid HD Radio

station while this unit is in the monaural tuning mode (page 55).

•This unit is capable of receiving both hybrid and all-digital HD Radio station signals. However, this unit may not automatically receive all-digital FM

station signals and the automatic tuning operation may stop. In this case, enter the frequency of the desired all-digital FM HD Radio station directly by

using the lNumeric keys (page 31).

The HD indicator lights up in the front panel display when

this unit is tuned into an HD Radio reception band. In this

state, you can select the desired audio program if the

selected FM HD Radio station provides multiple audio

programs (up to 8).

■When multiple audio programs are provided

Press wPRG SELECT b / a on the remote

control repeatedly to select the desired audio

program.

•You can also select audio program using lNumeric keys(1-8) and

lENT when this unit is in the automatic or manual tuning mode. In

case you select an audio program currently not available, “HDx Off” (“x”

indicates the program number) appears.

Notes

•When reception for an audio program ceases, the HD indicator

disappears from the front panel display and HD1 is automatically

selected after approximately 20 seconds.

•Some audio programs may not contain data programs depending on the

broadcasting station and the time period.

■When only one audio program is provided

If this unit is tuned into an FM HD Radio station including

only one audio program or an AM HD Radio station, you

cannot select audio programs.

■Behavior of the display

This unit automatically shows the HD Radio information

(call sign, etc) on the front panel display after 3 seconds.

You can switch HD Radio information to be displayed

(page 34).

This unit is equipped with the iTunes Tagging feature that

enables HD Radio listeners to “tag” songs for subsequent

preview and purchase on iTunes. For details on the iTunes

Tagging feature, visit “http://www.hdradio.com/”.

1Tune into an HD Radio station and select HD

Radio audio program (if available).

If the selected HD Radio program (or song being

played) supports the iTunes Tagging feature, the TAG

indicator lights up in the front panel display and

“TAG” appears on the GUI screen.

2While a song you want to tag is being played

back, press wTAG on the remote control.

If a song is tagged, “StorageSuccess” and the number

of stored iTunes Tagging information files (up to 50)

appear in the front panel display.

Notes

•“Insufficient Data’ appears in the front panel display and GUI

screen if tagging is not available.

•If a status message or an error message appears on the front panel

display or the GUI screen, see “iTunes Tagging” (page 80).

Using HD Radio™ features (U.S.A. model only)

Selecting HD Radio™ audio programs

88.9MHz1

Lights up

Audio program

number (relative/total)

Audio program

number (absolute)

87.5MHz

Lights up

Using the iTunes Tagging feature

WXYZ-FM

TAG

TUNED

Lights up

34 En

Using HD Radio™ features (U.S.A. model only)

•This unit transmits the “tag” data to the iPod if an iPod that

supports iTunes Tagging feature is stationed in the Yamaha iPod

universal dock (YDS-11, sold separately) connected to the DOCK

terminal of this unit. Otherwise, this unit stores the “tag” data (up

to 50) in the internal memory and will transmit it next time your

iPod is stationed.

Use this feature to display the HD Radio information in

the front panel display or on the GUI screen.

Note

•If a status message or an error message appears on the front panel display

or GUI screen, see “HD Radio Reception” (page 79).

■Front panel display

Press

INFO

(or

INFO

) repeatedly to toggle the

following HD Radio information display modes.

Back to “Call Sign”

Display example (Call Sign)

■GUI screen

Press uDISPLAY on the remote control to turn

on or off the information display.

The following information is displayed on the GUI screen.

aPreset number, call sign, audio program number

(relative/total)

bHD Radio icon, TUNED icon

cProgram category, artist name, song title, album

title

dSTEREO icon

eTAG icon

fFrequency indication gauge

gBand, frequency, audio program

•To hold or release the displayed information, press jENTER. While it

is held, the “HOLD” icon appears on the GUI screen.

Displaying HD Radio™ information

Call Sign

Call sign, frequency, audio program number (absolute)

Category

Program category, frequency, audio program number

(absolute)

Artist / Song

Artist name, song title, frequency, audio program

number (absolute)

Album

Album title, frequency, audio program number

(absolute)

Tag Info

The number of iTunes Tagging information files stored

in the internal memory, frequency, audio program

number (absolute)

DSP Program

Current sound field program (page 27), frequency, audio

program number (absolute)

Audio Decoder

Current audio decoder (page 29), frequency, audio

program number (absolute)

Frequency

Frequency, audio program number (absolute), audio

program number (relative/total)

WXYZ-FM

Preset no.10:

FM 88.9MHz-1

Ch Name

Category

Artist

Song

Classic Rock

Frankie Zipper

Road to India

Made-to-order

Input

DSP

Tuner

Straight Enhancer

Option Menu

Data Hold

WXYZ-FM HD 1/3

STEREO

TAG

TUNED

35 En

English

INTRODUCTION

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION APPENDIX

PREPARATION

BASIC

OPERATION

ADVANCED

OPERATION

Listening to Satellite Radio

To listen to Satellite Radio, you’ll need to connect either a SIRIUS or XM Satellite Radio tuner (sold separately) to your

satellite-ready receiver. Satellite Radio is available to residents of the US (except Alaska and Hawaii).

Satellite Radio delivers a variety of commercial-free music from categories ranging from Pop, Rock, Country, R&B,

Dance, Jazz, Classical and many more plus coverage of all the top professional and college sports including play by play

games from select leagues and teams. Additional programming includes expert sports talk, uncensored entertainment,

comedy, family programming, local traffic and weather and news from your most trusted sources.

Whether you purchase a SIRIUS or XM tuner, you’ll need to activate and subscribe to begin enjoying the service. Easy to

follow installation and setup instructions are provided with the satellite tuners. Whichever service you choose, there are a

variety of programming packages available, including the option of adding “The Best of SIRIUS” programming to your

XM tuner or “The Best of XM” programming to your SIRIUS tuner, enabling you to enjoy the most popular

programming among both services. The “Best of” packages are not available to SIRIUS or XM Canada subscribers at

this time. Family friendly packages are also available to restrict channels featuring content that may be inappropriate for

children.

To subscribe to XM, U.S. customers should visit xmradio.com or call 1-800-XMRADIO (1-800-967-2346).

To subscribe to SIRIUS, U.S. customers can call 1-888-539-SIRI (1-888-539-7474) or visit sirius.com (US).

Connect XM Mini-Tuner and XM Mini-Tuner Home

Dock (sold separately) to the XM jack on the rear panel of

this unit. For details, see the operating instructions

provided with the XM Mini-Tuner Home Dock.

•To ensure optimal reception of the XM Satellite Radio signals, the XM

Mini-Tuner Home Dock must be placed at or near a southerly facing

window with no obstacles in the path to the sky. You can mount it indoors

or outdoors. Use the “Antenna” information on the front panel display or

on the GUI screen (page 38) to check the antenna reception level and

adjust the orientation of the antenna.

Note

•If “CHECK ANTENNA”, “CHECK XM TUNER” or “NO SIGNAL”

appears on the front panel display, the connection and setting of the

antenna, XM Mini-Tuner Home Dock, or XM Mini-Tuner may not be

correct.

Once you have installed the XM Mini-Tuner Home Dock,

inserted the XM Mini-Tuner, connected the XM Mini-

Tuner Home Dock to your XM Ready® home audio

system, and installed the antenna, you are ready to

subscribe and begin receiving XM programming. There

are three places to find your eight character XM Radio ID:

on the XM Mini-Tuner, on the XM Mini-Tuner package,

and on XM Channel 0. Record the XM Radio ID in the

following eight squares for reference.

Note

•The XM Radio ID does not use the letters “I”, “O”, “S” or “F”. Activate

your XM Satellite Radio service in the U.S. online at http://

activate.xmradio.com/ or call 1-800-XM-RADIO (1-800-967-2346). You

will need a major credit card. XM will send a signal from the satellites to

activate the full channel lineup. Activation normally takes 10 to 15

minutes, but during peak busy periods you may need to keep your XM

Ready home audio system on for up to an hour. When you can access the

full lineup on your XM Ready home audio system you are done.

XM® Satellite Radio tuning (U.S.A. model only)

SIRIUS XM Radio Legal

SIRIUS, XM and all related marks and logos are trademarks of Sirius XM Radio Inc. and its subsidiaries. All other

separately. Taxes and a one-time activation fee may apply. XM tuners and home docks or SIRIUS tuners (each sold

separately) are required to receive the SIRIUS or XM satellite radio service. All programming and fees subject to

change. It is prohibited to copy, decompile, disassemble, reverse engineer, hack, manipulate or otherwise make

available any technology or software incorporated in receivers compatible with the SIRIUS or XM Satellite Radio

Systems. Service not available in Alaska and Hawaii.

Connecting XM Mini-Tuner Home Dock

NEN

VIDE

OUT

HDMI OUT

ANTENNA

HD R

(

DMI CONTR

)

IRIUS

XM Mini-Tuner and XM Mini-Tuner Home Dock

(sold separately)

Activating XM Satellite Radio

36 En

XM® Satellite Radio tuning (U.S.A. model only)

1Rotate the TINPUT selector (or press

dXM) to select “XM” as the input source.

The XM Satellite Radio information (such as channel

number, channel name, category, artist name, or song

title) for the currently selected channel appears on the

front panel display and GUI screen (page 38).

•When you select “XM” as the input source, this unit automatically

recalls the previously selected channel.

Note

•If a status message or an error message appears on the front panel

display or on the GUI screen, see “XM Satellite Radio” (page 80).

2Search for a channel by using one of the XM

Satellite Radio search modes.

•To select a channel from the all channel list, see

“All Channel Search mode” on this page.

•To select a channel by category, see “Category

Search mode” on this page.

•To select the desired channel directly by entering

the channel number, see “Direct number access” on

this page.

•To select a channel from the preset channels, see

“Calling a preset channel (Preset Search mode)”

(page 37).

•You can display the XM Satellite Radio information on the front

panel display or on the GUI screen (page 38).

•You can set the XM Satellite Radio preset channels (page 37).

■All Channel Search mode

Press ITUNING/CH l / h (or eTUN./CH k /

n) repeatedly to search for a channel within all

channels.

•You can search for a channel quickly by holding down

ITUNING/CH l / h (or eTUN./CH k / n).

•You can skip channels to the previous or next category by pressing

HCATEGORY (or eCATEGORY l / h).

■Category Search mode

1Press HCATEGORY (or eCATEGORY l /

h) to select the channel category.

“CAT” is displayed on the front panel display during

the channel category selection. When you select the

category, the first channel in the category is selected.

Note

•If you do not operate within 10 seconds, the category search mode

returns to “ALL” (All Channel Search).

2While “CAT” is displayed on the front panel

display, press ITUNING/CH l / h (or

eTUN./CH k / n) repeatedly to search for a

channel within the selected channel

category.

•You can search for a channel quickly by pressing and holding

ITUNING/CH l / h (or eTUN./CH k / n).

Note

•This unit skips the channels when this unit is in the All Channel

Search mode or Category Search mode in the following cases (it is

not malfunction of this unit):

–the channel is out of service.

–you do not subscribe to the channel.

■Direct number access

In the All Channel Search mode or Category

search mode, press the lNumeric keys to

enter the desired three-digit channel number.

For example, to enter the number 123, press the

lNumeric keys as “1”, “2” and “3”.

•To display the Radio ID number displayed on the front panel display,

select channel “0”.

•To enter a one-digit or two-digit channel number, press the lNumeric

keys on the remote control and then press lENT to confirm the input

number.

•Instead of pressing lENT to tune into the channel immediately, you

can wait a few seconds until this unit confirms the entered channel

number.

•If no key is pressed within a few seconds after you enter a one-digit or

two-digit number, this unit automatically confirms the entered channel

number.

•If the selected channel is not available, an advisory message may appear.

For details, see “XM Satellite Radio” (page 80).

XM Satellite Radio® operations

001Preview

Search mode

Channel number Channel name

00880's

Pop

Category

search mode The first channel in the category

Category name

37 En

XM® Satellite Radio tuning (U.S.A. model only)

English

INTRODUCTION

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION APPENDIX

PREPARATION

BASIC

OPERATION

ADVANCED

OPERATION

You can use this feature to store up to 40 XM Satellite

Radio channels. You can then recall any preset channel

easily by selecting the preset channel as described in

“Calling a preset channel (Preset Search mode)” on this

page.

1Search a channel you want to set as a preset

channel in one of the XM Satellite Radio

search modes.

For details, see “XM Satellite Radio operations”

(page 36).

2Press GMEMORY (or eMEMORY).

The indicator on the front panel display changes as

follows.

•By holding down GMEMORY (or eMEMORY) for more than

2 seconds, you can skip the following steps and automatically

lastly-registered preset number).

•To cancel the preset operation, press jRETURN.

3Press FPRESET l / h (or ePRESET k / n)

to select the stored preset station number.

•You can also select a preset number using the lNumeric

keys.

•If you select a preset number being used (currently registered

channel number appears next to the preset number), the current

preset channel will be overwritten.

4Press GMEMORY (or eMEMORY).

Prior to selecting a preset channel in the Preset Search

mode, you must preset XM channels. For details, see

“Registering preset channels” on this page.

Press FPRESET l / h (or ePRESET k / n)

repeatedly to change the preset channel number

(1 to 40).

•You can directly select a preset number by pressing a lNumeric key

while calling a preset channel.

You can clear the assignments of preset XM Satellite

Radio channels.

1Press sOPTION on the remote control.

The Option menu for “XM” is displayed.

2Press jCursor k / n repeatedly to select

“Clear Preset” and then press jENTER.

3Press jCursor k / n to select the preset

station number that you want to clear.

4Press jENTER to execute the clearing of

the selected preset channel.

To clear the registration of multiple preset numbers,

repeat steps 3 and 4.

5To exit the Option menu, press sOPTION.

Registering XM Satellite Radio

channels

Registering preset channels

00880's

P01:---<<008

Currently registered channel number

(or “---” if empty)

Channel number to be

registered

Preset number to which new

channel number is registered

Calling a preset channel (Preset Search

mode)

Clearing preset channels

00880's

Preset channel number

008 80's

38 En

XM® Satellite Radio tuning (U.S.A. model only)

Use this feature to display the XM Satellite Radio information

on the front panel display or on the GUI screen.

Note

•If a status message or an error message appears on the front panel display

or GUI screen, see “XM Satellite Radio” (page 80).

■Front panel display

Press EINFO (or fINFO) repeatedly to toggle

the following XM Satellite Radio information

display modes.

Back to “Channel”

Display example (Antenna)

•You can configure the scroll setting of the front panel display with “Front

Panel Display Scroll” in the Setup menu (page 63).

•If the XM Satellite Radio information contains a character that cannot be

recognized by this unit, the character will be displayed with a space.

•When an information is unavailable, “––––” appears.

■GUI screen

Press uDISPLAY on the remote control to turn

on or off the information display.

The following information is displayed on the GUI screen.

aChannel number

bSearch mode (page 36)

cChannel name, channel category, artist name,

song title

dAntenna reception level

•To hold or release the displayed information, press jENTER. While it

is held, the “HOLD” icon appears on the GUI screen.

Displaying the XM Satellite Radio™

information

Channel

Channel number, channel name

Category

Channel category, channel number

Artist / Song

Artist name, song title, channel number

Antenna

Antenna reception level, channel number

DSP Program

Current sound field program (page 27), channel number

Audio Decoder

Current audio decoder (page 29), channel number

Antenna

Ch 008

All Channel Search

Ch Name

Category

Artist

Song

80’s

Decades

Sanumemo

Road to India

Input

DSP

Straight Enhancer

Option Menu

Hold Data

39 En

English

INTRODUCTION

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION APPENDIX

PREPARATION

BASIC

OPERATION

ADVANCED

OPERATION

Connect the SiriusConnect tuner (sold separately) to the

SIRIUS jack on the rear panel of this unit. For details, see

the operating instructions provided with the SiriusConnect

tuner.

•To ensure optimal reception of the SIRIUS Satellite Radio signals, the

antenna of the SiriusConnect tuner must be placed at or near a window

with no obstacles in the path to the sky. The orientation of the antenna for

the best reception differs depending on the area. Refer to the instruction

manuals supplied with the SiriusConnect tuner for the installation of the

antenna. You can mount it indoors or outdoors.

•Use the “Antenna” information in the front panel or “SIRIUS

Information” screen on the GUI screen (page 43) to check the antenna

reception level and adjust the orientation of the antenna.

•You need to connect the SiriusConnect tuner to the AC wall outlet.

Notes

•If “CHECK SR TUNER” or “ANTENNA ERROR” appears on the front

panel display, the connection of the SiriusConnect tuner or antenna is

incorrect. In such cases, check the connection of the SiriusConnect tuner

and the antenna.

•If “NOT SUPPORTED” appears on the front panel display, this unit does

not support the connected SiriusConnect tuner.

Before using the SIRIUS Satellite Radio feature, you need

to activate your SIRIUS Satellite Radio subscription. To

activate the subscription you need the Sirius ID which is

uniquely assigned to the SiriusConnect tuner. Sirius ID is

12-digit number and it appears on the package of the

SiriusConnect tuner, on the label of the SiriusConnect

tuner, and when you tune into the SIRIUS Satellite Radio

channel “0” (see below).

1Rotate the TINPUT selector (or press

dSIRIUS) to select “SIRIUS” as the input

source.

2Press l0 and then lENT to display the

Sirius ID of your SiriusConnect tuner.

“000 Sirius ID” and “xxxxxxxxxxxx”

(“xxxxxxxxxxxx” indicates the 12-digit Sirius ID of

your SiriusConnect tuner) appears alternately on the

front panel display.

Write the Sirius ID below.

ID:________________________________________

3Contact SIRIUS Satellite Radio to activate

your subscription.

•Status messages appear on the front panel display or GUI screen

during the activation. For details, see “SIRIUS Satellite Radio”

(page 81). Once the activation is finished, “SUB UPDATED”

appears.

1Rotate the TINPUT selector (or press

dSIRIUS) to select “SIRIUS” as the input

source.

The SIRIUS indicator lights up on the front panel

display and the SIRIUS Satellite Radio information

(such as channel number, channel name, category,

artist name, or song title) for the currently selected

channel appears on the front panel display.

•When you select “SIRIUS” as the input source, this unit

automatically recalls the previously selected channel.

Notes

•When you have not activated your subscription yet, you can only

select “184” or “000”.

•If a status message or an error message appears on the front panel

display or on the GUI screen, see “SIRIUS Satellite Radio”

(page 81).

SIRIUS Satellite Radio™ tuning (U.S.A. model only)

Connecting the SiriusConnect™ tuner

Activating SIRIUS Satellite Radio™

subscription

SIRIUS

NENT

VIDEO

OUT

DC 5V

ANT

SiriusConnect Tuner and the antenna

(sold separately)

To the AC wall outlet

Displaying the Sirius ID of your

SiriusConnect tuner

SIRIUS Satellite Radio online information

Contact for activation

URL: https://activate.siriusradio.com/

Phone: 1-888-539-SIRIUS (1-888-539-7474)

SIRIUS Satellite Radio™ operations

184Weather

SIRIUS

Search mode

Channel number Channel name

40 En

SIRIUS Satellite Radio™ tuning (U.S.A. model only)

2Search for a channel by using one of the

SIRIUS Satellite Radio search modes.

•To select a channel from the all channel list, see

“All Channel Search mode” on this page.

•To select a channel by category, see “Category

Search mode” on this page.

•To select the desired channel directly by entering

the channel number, see “Direct number access” on

this page.

•To select a channel from the preset channels, see

“Calling a preset channel (Preset Search mode)”

(page 41).

•You can display the SIRIUS Satellite Radio information on the

front panel display or on the GUI screen (page 43).

•If you tune into a channel that you do not subscribe, “CALL

SIRIUS” (on the front panel display) and “CALL 888-539-SIRIUS

TO SUBSCRIBE” (on the GUI screen) appear.

•You can set the SIRIUS Satellite Radio preset channels (page 41).

■All Channel Search mode

Press ITUNING/CH l / h (or eTUN./CH k /

n) repeatedly to search for a channel within all

channels.

•You can search for a channel quickly by holding down

ITUNING/CH l / h (or eTUN./CH k / n).

•You can skip channels to the previous or next category by pressing

HCATEGORY (or eCATEGORY l / h).

■Category Search mode

1Press HCATEGORY (or eCATEGORY l /

h) to select the channel category.

“CAT” is displayed on the front panel display during

channel category selection. When you select the

category, the first channel in the category is selected.

Note

•If you do not operate within 10 seconds, the category search mode

returns to “ALL” (All Channel Search).

2While “CAT” is displayed on the front panel

display, press ITUNING/CH l / h (or

eTUN./CH k / n) repeatedly to search for a

channel within the selected channel

category.

•You can search for a channel quickly by pressing and holding

ITUNING/CH l / h (or eTUN./CH k / n).

Note

•This unit skips the channels when this unit is in the All Channel

Search mode or Category Search mode in the following cases (it is

not malfunction of this unit):

–the channel is locked (page 42).

–the channel is out of service.

–you do not subscribe to the channel.

■Direct number access

In the All Channel Search mode or Category

search mode, press the lNumeric keys to

enter the desired three-digit channel number.

For example, to enter the number 123, press the

lNumeric keys as “1”, “2” and “3”.

•To display the Sirius ID number displayed on the front panel display,

select channel “0”.

•To enter a one-digit or two-digit channel number, press the lNumeric

keys on the remote control and then press lENT to confirm the input

number.

•Instead of pressing lENT to tune into the channel immediately, you

can wait a few seconds until this unit confirms the entered channel

number.

•If no key is pressed within a few seconds after you enter a one-digit or

two-digit number, this unit automatically confirms the entered channel

number.

•If the selected channel is locked, “PIN:___” appears on the front panel

display. Enter the four-digit Parental Lock code number by using the

lNumeric keys or press lENT to cancel (page 42).

•If the selected channel is not available, an advisory message may appear.

For details, see “SIRIUS Satellite Radio” (page 81).

001Hits1

SIRIUS

Pop

SIRIUS

Category

search mode The first channel in the category

Category name

41 En

SIRIUS Satellite Radio™ tuning (U.S.A. model only)

English

INTRODUCTION

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION APPENDIX

PREPARATION

BASIC

OPERATION

ADVANCED

OPERATION

You can use this feature to store up to 40 SIRIUS Satellite

Radio channels. You can then recall any preset channel

easily by selecting the preset channel group and number as

described in “Calling a preset channel (Preset Search

mode)” on this page.

1Search a channel you want to set as a preset

channel in one of the SIRIUS Satellite Radio

search modes.

For details, see “SIRIUS Satellite Radio operations”

(page 39).

2Press GMEMORY (or eMEMORY).

The indicator on the front panel display changes as

follows.

•By holding down GMEMORY (or eMEMORY) for more than

2 seconds, you can skip the following steps and automatically

lastly-registered preset number).

•To cancel the preset operation, press jRETURN.

3Press FPRESET l / h (or ePRESET k / n)

to select the stored preset station number.

•You can also select a preset number using the lNumeric

keys.

•If you select a preset number being used (currently registered

channel number appears next to the preset number), the current

preset channel will be overwritten.

4Press GMEMORY (or eMEMORY).

Prior to selecting a preset channel in the Preset Search

mode, you must preset SIRIUS channels. For details, see

“Registering preset channels” on this page.

Press FPRESET l / h (or ePRESET k / n)

repeatedly to change the preset channel number

(1 to 40).

You can clear the assignments of preset SIRIUS Satellite

Radio channels.

1Press sOPTION on the remote control.

The Option menu for “SIRIUS” is displayed.

2Press jCursor k / n repeatedly to select

“Clear Preset” and then press jENTER.

3Press jCursor k / n to select the preset

station number that you want to clear.

4Press jENTER to execute the clearing of

the selected preset channel.

To clear the registration of multiple preset numbers,

repeat steps 3 and 4.

5To exit the Option menu, press sOPTION.

Registering SIRIUS Satellite Radio™

channels

Registering preset channels

001Hits1

SIRIUS

P01:---<<001

SIRIUS

Currently registered channel number

(or “---” if empty)

Channel number to be

registered

Preset number to which new

channel number is registered

Calling a preset channel (Preset Search

mode)

Clearing preset channels

001Hits1

SIRIUS

001 Hits 1

SIRIUS

42 En

SIRIUS Satellite Radio™ tuning (U.S.A. model only)

You can use the Parental Lock feature to limit the access

to the desired SIRIUS Satellite channels. This unit

automatically skips the locked channels when this unit is

in the All Channel Search mode or Category Search mode

and you search a channel by pressing ITUNING/CH

l / h (or eTUN./CH k / n).

Use this feature to set the Parental Lock code number

(PIN) and select the channels to be locked.

1Press sOPTION on the remote control.

The Option menu for “SIRIUS” is displayed.

2Press jCursor k / n repeatedly to select

“Parental Lock” and then press jENTER.

3Use jCursor l / h (to select a digit to edit)

and jCursor k / n (to select a number) to

enter the desired 4-digit code number.

If you have entered a code number before, enter the

same code number.

4Press jENTER.

The confirmation screen appears.

5Press jENTER again to confirm the code

number.

“OK” and then the SIRIUS Satellite Radio channel

list appears.

Note

•If a code number is already registered and you enter the different

number, “Wrong” appears and the screen returns to step 3. Enter

the correct code number.

•If you forget the Parental lock code or want to change it, reset it

using “SR PIN” (page 73).

6Press jCursor l / h to select the category

of a channel you want to lock.

7Press jCursor k / n to select a channel you

want to lock.

Notes

•You can also select a channel by using eCATEGORY l / h or

eTUN./CH k / n.

•While the SIRIUS Satellite Radio channel list screen is displayed,

sound of the selected channel is output even the channel is locked.

8Press jENTER to lock the selected

channel.

A check mark appears next to the locked channel on

the GUI screen. You can toggle channel lock and

unlock as you press jENTER.

9Repeat steps 6 through 8 to lock all the

desired channels.

10 Press jRETURN repeatedly to exit the

“Parental Lock” screen.

This unit is tuned into the last channel you select in

the “Parental Lock” screen. If the channel is locked,

this unit is tuned into “184 Weather/Emergency” or

“000 Sirius ID”.

Tune into the channel with direct number access (page 40)

or Preset Search mode (page 41). When you tune into the

locked channel, “LOCKED” appears on the front panel

display and GUI screen, followed by the following

message. Enter the set Parental lock code by using the

lNumeric keys. To cancel this operation, press

lENT.

Note

•If an incorrect number is entered, “Wrong” appears on the front panel

display or the GUI screen and this unit is tuned into the previously

selected channel.

Setting the Parental Lock

Setting the code number and the locking

channels

The entered code number is needed for tuning in the

channel or unlocking the channel. Write it down below.

Code number: ________________________________

00 0 0

Input

DSP

Parental Lock

SIRIUS

7ch Enhancer Edit

Set

Enter New PIN

Tuning into the locked channels

Input

DSP

Channel

001 SIRIUS Hits 1

002 The Blend

003 SIRIUS XM Love

004 40s on 4

005 50s on 5

Parental Lock

Category

Pop

SIRIUS

7ch Enhancer

Select Cat / Ch

Lock / Unlock

Input

DSP

Channel

006 ’60s Vibrations

007 Totally ’70s

008 Big ’80s

009 The Pulse

010 The Bridge

Parental Lock

Category

Pop

SIRIUS

7ch Enhancer

Select Cat / Ch

Lock / Unlock

PIN:

SIRIUS

43 En

SIRIUS Satellite Radio™ tuning (U.S.A. model only)

English

INTRODUCTION

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION APPENDIX

PREPARATION

BASIC

OPERATION

ADVANCED

OPERATION

Use this feature to display the SIRIUS Satellite Radio

information on the front panel display or on the GUI

screen.

Note

•If a status message or an error message appears on the front panel display

or GUI screen, see “SIRIUS Satellite Radio” (page 81).

■Front panel display

Press EINFO (or fINFO) repeatedly to toggle

the following SIRIUS Satellite Radio information

display modes.

Back to “Channel”

Display example (Antenna)

•You can configure the scroll setting of the front panel display with “Front

Panel Display Scroll” in the Setup menu (page 63).

•If the SIRIUS Satellite Radio information contains a character that

cannot be recognized by this unit, the character will be displayed with a

space.

•When the antenna of the SiriusConnect tuner cannot receive the signals,

“ACQUIRING” appears on the front panel display.

•When an information is unavailable, “––––” appears.

■GUI screen

Press uDISPLAY on the remote control to turn

on or off the information display.

The following information is displayed on the GUI screen.

aChannel number

bSearch mode (page 40)

cChannel name, channel category, artist name,

song title, composer name

dAntenna reception level

•To hold or release the displayed information, press jENTER. While it

is held, the “HOLD” icon appears on the GUI screen..

Displaying the SIRIUS Satellite

Radio™ information

Channel

Channel number, channel name

Category

Channel category, channel number

Artist/Song

Artist name, song title, channel number

Composer

Composer name, channel number

Antenna

Antenna reception level, channel number

DSP Program

Current sound field program (page 27)

Audio Decoder

Current audio decoder (page 29)

Antenna

SIRIUS

Ch 001

All Channel Search

Ch Name

Category

Artist

Song

Composer

SIRIUS Hits 1

Pop

Sanumemo

Road to India

Frankie Zipper

Input

DSP

SIRIUS

Straight Enhancer

Option Menu

Hold Data

44 En

Once you have stationed your iPod in a Yamaha iPod universal dock (such as the YDS-11, sold separately) connected to

the DOCK terminal on the rear panel of this unit (page 18), you can enjoy playback of your iPod using the supplied

remote control or the menu displayed on the GUI screen. You can also use the Compressed Music Enhancer mode of this

unit to improve the sound quality of the compression artifacts (such as MP3 format) stored on your iPod (page 29).

Notes

•iPod touch, iPod (Click and Wheel including iPod classic), iPod nano, and iPod mini are supported.

•Some features may not be compatible depending on the model or the software version of your iPod.

•Some features may not be available depending on the model of Yamaha iPod universal dock. The following sections describe the procedure when using

the YDS-11.

•Once the connection between your iPod and this unit is complete, “iPod connected” appears on the front panel display.

•For a complete list of status messages that appear on the front panel display and GUI screen, see “iPod” (page 83).

•(U.S.A. model only)

Once the connection between an iPod that supports iTunes Tagging feature and this unit is complete, this unit transmits iTunes Tagging information to the

iPod (page 33).

You can control your iPod when you set it in the iPod

universal dock and switch the input source to DOCK. The

operations of your iPod can be done with the aid of the

video display (menu browse mode) or without it (simple

remote mode).

When you connect your iPod to this unit, you can perform

the following operations with the remote control.

You can perform basic iPod operations (play, stop, skip,

etc.) using the supplied remote control without displaying

the menu on the GUI screen. You can also directly control

your iPod in this mode.

You can browse song or video files stored on your iPod

using the GUI screen. You cannot directly control your

iPod in this mode.

•“_”(underscore) is displayed for characters that this unit cannot display.

1Rotate the TINPUT selector (or press

dDOCK) to select “iPod” (DOCK) as the

input source.

2Press uDISPLAY on the remote control.

3Press jCursor k / n to select “Music” or

“Videos” and then press jCursor h.

•Select “Music” to browse music files.

•Select “Videos” to browse video files.

Note

•The “Videos” menu does not appear unless the both your iPod and

Yamaha iPod universal dock support the video browsing feature.

4Press jCursor k / n / l / h to select a

menu item and then press jENTER to start

playback.

Using iPod™

Controlling iPod™

Key Function

ENTER Subsequent menu

kMenu up

nMenu down

lPrevious menu

hSubsequent menu

pPlay (Menu browse mode)

Play/Pause (Simple remote mode)

sStop

ePause (Menu browse mode)

Play/Pause (Simple remote mode)

wSearch backward (Press and hold)

fSearch forward (Press and hold)

bSkip backward

aSkip forward

uDISPLAY Switch between Menu browse mode and

Simple remote mode

Controlling iPod in simple remote mode

Controlling iPod in menu browse mode

Input

DSP

Music

Videos

iPod

DOCK

STRAIGHT

45 En

Using iPod™

English

INTRODUCTION

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION APPENDIX

PREPARATION

BASIC

OPERATION

ADVANCED

OPERATION

■Play information display

a Shuffle and repeat icons

b (playback), (pausing), (search forward) and

(search backward)

c Album art (image of CD jacket, etc)

d Elapsed time, progress bar, remaining time

e Song title, artist name, album title

•You can switch the information displayed on the front panel display by

pressing EINFO (or fINFO).

•Album arts are available only when the file contains image data.

■Shuffle/repeat playback

When controlling iPod in simple remote mode, operate the

iPod directly to set the shuffle and repeat playback.

1Press uDISPLAY to switch to menu browse

mode while “DOCK” is selected as the input

source.

2Press sOPTION on the remote control.

The Option menu for “iPod” is displayed (page 54).

3Press jCursor k / n to select “Shuffle” or

“Repeat”, press jENTER and then press

jCursor l / h to select the desired

playback style.

Shuffle:

•Select “Off” if you do not want to play back in

random order.

•Select “Songs” to play back songs in random order.

•Select “Albums” to play back albums in random

order.

Repeat:

•Select “Off” if you do not want to play back

repeatedly.

•Select “One” to repeat each song.

•Select “All” to repeat all songs.

4To exit the Option menu, press sOPTION.

Input

DSP

dMade-to-order

Frankie Zipper

Road to India

Song

Artist

Album

01:04 –02:27

DOCK

Straight

46 En

You can connect a Yamaha Bluetooth wireless audio receiver (such as YBA-10, sold separately) to the DOCK terminal of

this unit and enjoy the music contents stored in your Bluetooth component (such as a portable music player) without

wiring between this unit and the Bluetooth component.

Note

•This unit supports A2DP (Advanced Audio Distribution Profile) of the Bluetooth profile.

•For a complete list of status messages that appear on the front panel display and GUI screen, see “Bluetooth™” (page 83).

•If the pairing data has been cleared from the Bluetooth wireless audio

receiver or your Bluetooth component, you need to perform pairing

again.

•For details on operations on your Bluetooth component, refer to the

operating instruction of it.

1Rotate the TINPUT selector (or press

dDOCK) to select “BLUETOOTH” (DOCK)

as the input source.

2Turn on the Bluetooth component you want

to pair with and set it to pairing mode.

3Press sOPTION on the remote control.

The Option menu for “BLUETOOTH” is displayed

(page 54).

4Press jCursor n to select “Pairing” and

then press jENTER.

“Searching” appears and the pairing operation starts.

•To cancel pairing, press jRETURN.

•You can also start pairing operation by holding down

GMEMORY on the front panel.

5Make sure the Bluetooth component

recognizes the Bluetooth wireless audio

receiver.

If the Bluetooth component detects the Bluetooth

wireless audio receiver, “YBA-10 YAMAHA”

(example) appears in the Bluetooth device list.

6Select the Bluetooth wireless audio receiver

in the Bluetooth device list, and enter a pass

key “0000” into the Bluetooth component.

When pairing is complete, “Completed” appears on

the front panel display.

1Rotate the TINPUT selector (or press

dDOCK) to select “BLUETOOTH” (DOCK)

as the input source.

2Press sOPTION on the remote control.

3Press jCursor n to select “Connect” and

then press jENTER.

The Bluetooth connection is established between the

Bluetooth wireless audio receiver and your Bluetooth

component connected last time.

•If the Bluetooth wireless audio receiver cannot find the Bluetooth

component connected last time, “Not found” appears on the front

panel display.

•To disconnect the Bluetooth wireless audio receiver from the

Bluetooth component currently connected, select “Disconnect” and

then press jENTER or perform a disconnect operation on the

Bluetooth component.

•

To make a connection between the Bluetooth wireless audio receiver

and another Bluetooth component (already paired), perform a

connect operation on the Bluetooth component while no Bluetooth

connection is established on the Bluetooth wireless audio receiver.

4Start playback of the Bluetooth component.

5To exit the Option menu, press sOPTION.

Using Bluetooth™ components

About “Pairing”

Pairing (registration of the Bluetooth devices) must be performed when making Bluetooth connections between the

Yamaha Bluetooth wireless audio receiver and your Bluetooth components for the first time. Once pairing is complete,

you can select one of the Bluetooth components to connect to the Yamaha Bluetooth wireless audio receiver for playback.

•Yamaha Bluetooth wireless audio receiver YBA-10 can be paired with up to eight Bluetooth components. If ninth pairing data is registered, the pairing

data for the component least recently used is cleared.

Pairing the Bluetooth™ wireless audio

receiver and your Bluetooth

component

To ensure security, a time limit of 8 minutes is set for

the pairing operation. You are recommended to read

and fully understand all the instructions before starting.

Input

DSP

Volume Trim

Connect

Pairing

Option Menu

BLUETOOTH

7ch Enhancer

Playback of the Bluetooth™

component

47 En

English

INTRODUCTION

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION APPENDIX

PREPARATION

BASIC

OPERATION

ADVANCED

OPERATION

You can enjoy playback of WAV (PCM format only), MP3, WMA , MPEG-4 AAC and FLAC files stored on your USB

memory device or USB portable player connected to the USB port on the front panel of this unit. This unit supports USB

mass storage class devices (FAT 16 or FAT 32 format, except USB HDDs).

Notes

•You can play back only the files stored in the first partition.

•Some files may not be playable depending on models and types of USB storage devices.

•For a complete list of status messages that appear on the front panel display and GUI screen, see “USB and network” (page 84).

1Connect your USB storage device to the

NUSB port on the front panel (page 19).

2Rotate the TINPUT selector (or press

dUSB/NET and then xUSB) to select

“USB” as the input source.

If you have connected the USB storage device to this

unit before, playback of the music file played at the

last time automatically starts.

3Press jCursor k / n / l / h to select a

music file to play back.

•To select a file or folder, press jCursor k / n.

•To confirm the selection, press jCursor h or

jENTER.

•To return to the previous menu, press jCursor

4Press jENTER to start playback.

You can also perform the following operations with

the remote control.

■Play information display

a Shuffle and repeat icons

b (playback)

c Album art (image of CD jacket, etc)

d Elapsed time

e Song title, artist name, album title

•You can switch the information displayed on the front panel display by

pressing EINFO (or fINFO) (page 26).

•Album arts are available only when the file contains image data.

•These settings are also reflected in playback of PC and Rhapsody®

contents.

1Press sOPTION on the remote control

while “USB” is selected as the input source.

The Option menu for “USB” is displayed (page 54).

2Press jCursor k / n to select “Shuffle” or

“Repeat”, press jENTER and then press

jCursor l / h to select the desired

playback style.

Shuffle:

•Select “Off” if you do not want to play back in

random order.

•Select “On” to play back music files in random

order.

Repeat:

•Select “Off” if you do not want to play back

repeatedly.

•Select “One” to repeat each music file.

•Select “All” to repeat all music files in the folder.

3To exit the Option menu, press sOPTION.

Using USB storage devices

Playback of the USB storage device

Key Function

pPlay

sStop

aSkip forward during playback

bSkip backward during playback

Input

DSP

Road to India

Symphony 01

Symphony 02

Symphony 03

Take–Hero

USB

7ch Enhancer

Option Menu

Shuffle/repeat playback

Input

DSP

00:30

Made-to-order

Frankie Zipper

Road to India

Song

Artist

Album

USB

7ch Enhancer

Option Menu

48 En

You can enjoy playback of audio files stored on PCs connected to this unit via your network. To play back audio files on

your PC, you need to install Windows Media Player 11 on the PC and configure the media sharing setting of Windows

Media Player 11.

Note

•If you do not use a DHCP server, configure the network parameters (IP address, etc) of this unit manually (page 64)

1Install Windows Media Player 11 on your PC.

You can download the installer of Windows Media

Player 11 from the Microsoft website, or use the

upgrade function of the installed Microsoft Windows

Media Player.

2Turn on your PC then allow media sharing.

Activate Windows Media Player 11 first, enable the

media sharing and then select this unit as a device to

which the media is shared.

Note

•If the operating system (OS) of your PC is Windows Vista, Windows

Media Player 11 is pre-installed (except some products).

•Some security software installed on your PC (anti-virus software,

firewall software, etc.) may block the access of this unit to your PC. In

such cases, configure the security software appropriately.

•You can connect this unit to up to 16 PC servers, and each server must be

connected to the same subnet as this unit.

•For a complete list of status messages that appear on the front panel

display and GUI screen, see “USB and network” (page 84).

1Rotate the TINPUT selector (or press

dUSB/NET and then xPC) to select “PC”

as the input source.

2Press jCursor k / n / l / h to select a PC

server and music file to play back.

•To select a PC server, folder or file, press

jCursor k / n.

•To confirm the selection, press jCursor h or

jENTER.

•To return to the previous menu, press jCursor

•To update the PC server list displayed in the GUI screen, press

sOPTION, press jCursor k / n to select “Refresh” and then

press jENTER. To exit the Option menu, press sOPTION.

3Press jENTER to start playback.

You can also perform the following operations with

the remote control.

■Play information display

a Shuffle and repeat icons

b (playback)

c Album art (image of CD jacket, etc)

d Elapsed time

e Song title, artist name, album title

•You can switch the information displayed on the front panel display by

pressing EINFO (or fINFO) (page 26).

•Album arts are available only when the file contains image data.

Using PC servers

Windows Media Player 11 setup

Playback of PC music contents

Input

DSP

PC_SERVER01

PC_SERVER02

7ch Enhancer

Option Menu

Key Function

pPlay

sStop

aSkip forward during playback

bSkip backward during playback

Input

DSP

00:13

Made-to-order

Frankie Zipper

Road to India

Song

Artist

Album

7ch Enhancer

Option Menu

49 En

Using PC servers

English

INTRODUCTION

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION APPENDIX

PREPARATION

BASIC

OPERATION

ADVANCED

OPERATION

•These settings are also reflected in playback of USB and

Rhapsody® contents.

1Press sOPTION on the remote control

while “PC” is selected as the input source.

The Option menu for “PC” is displayed (page 54).

2Press jCursor k / n to select “Shuffle” or

“Repeat”, press jENTER and then press

jCursor l / h to select the desired

playback style.

Shuffle:

•Select “Off” if you do not want to play back in

random order.

•Select “On” to play back music files in random

order.

Repeat:

•Select “Off” if you do not want to play back

repeatedly.

•Select “One” to repeat each music file.

•Select “All” to repeat all music files in the folder.

3To exit the Option menu, press sOPTION.

Shuffle/repeat playback

50 En

You can listen to Internet Radio stations using the vTuner Internet Radio station database service particularly customized

for this unit, providing a database of over 2000 radio stations. Also, you can store your favorite stations with bookmarks.

Note

•To use this feature, your network must be connected to the Internet.

•A narrowband Internet connection (i.e. 56K modem, ISDN) will not provide satisfactory results, and a broadband connection is strongly recommended

(i.e. a cable modem, an xDSL modem, etc.). For detailed information, consult with your ISP.

•If you do not use a DHCP server, configure the network parameters (IP address, etc) of this unit manually (page 64)

•Some security devices (such as firewall) may block the access of this unit to Internet Radio stations. In such cases, configure the security settings

appropriately.

•This service may be discontinued without notice.

•Some Internet Radio stations may not be played

•For a complete list of status messages that appear on the front panel

display and GUI screen, see “USB and network” (page 84).

1Rotate the TINPUT selector (or press

dUSB/NET and then xNET RADIO) to

select “NET RADIO” as the input source.

2Press jCursor k / n / l / h to select an

item to play back.

•To select an item, press jCursor k / n.

•To confirm the selection, press jCursor h or

jENTER.

•To return to the previous menu, press jCursor

3Press jENTER to start playback.

You can also perform the following operations with

the remote control.

■Play information display

a (playback)

b Station name

•You can switch the information displayed on the front panel display by

pressing EINFO (or fINFO) (page 26).

1Select the desired Internet Radio station.

2Press eMEMORY.

The selected Internet Radio station is added to the

“Bookmarks” list in “NET RADIO” .

•To remove stations from the “Bookmarks” list, select the station under

“Bookmarks” and then press eMEMORY.

•You can also register your favorite Internet Radio stations on this unit by

accessing the website with the web browser on your PC. To use this

feature, you need the vTuner ID of this unit (page 65) and your e-mail

address to create your personal account. For details, refer to the help

information on the website. URL: http://yradio.vtuner.com/

Using the Internet Radio feature

Listening to Internet Radio

Key Function

pPlay

sStop

Input

DSP

Bookmarks

Locations

Genres

New Stations

Popular Stations

Podcasts

Help

NET RADIO

7ch Enhancer

Option Menu

Storing your favorite Internet Radio

stations with bookmarks

1.fm 80s Euro

Input

DSP

NET RADIO

7ch Enhancer

Option Menu

Bookmark

51 En

English

INTRODUCTION

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION APPENDIX

PREPARATION

BASIC

OPERATION

ADVANCED

OPERATION

The Rhapsody® service is the power behind the Rhapsody® Media Player (the Rhapsody® player software that you can

download to your computer). Rhapsody® service supplies the music, keeps My Library up to date, provides you with

Rhapsody® channels, the Playlist Central online community, and manages your downloads. Your software connects to

Rhapsody® service through the internet. Because your account information and Rhapsody® content are on servers

instead of any individual computer, your music is infinitely portable. Much of what you see in the Display area comes

from Rhapsody® service. What you can do with Rhapsody® service depends on your subscription. You can use

Rhapsody® service for free, or get even more from a paid membership. The Rhapsody® service also brings you

Rhapsody® Online, a streamlined, internet version of Rhapsody® that you can access from almost anywhere. Just sign in

to your Rhapsody® account to start letting the Rhapsody® service work for you.

For more information, http://www.rhapsody.com/

When you select “Rhapsody” for the first time, the

account setup screen appears. Set up your Rhapsody®

account to start using the Rhapsody® service on this unit.

•You can view the account information or edit your Rhapsody® account

later with “Rhapsody Information” in the Setup menu (page 65).

•For a complete list of status messages that appear on the front panel

display and GUI screen, see “USB and network” (page 84).

1Rotate the TINPUT selector (or press

dUSB/NET and then xRHAPSODY) to

select “Rhapsody” as the input source.

2Press jCursor k / n to select “Sign In to

your account” and then press jENTER.

•To subscribe to the Rhapsody® service using 30-day free trial,

select “Start Free 30-day trial” in step 2 and then read the

description on the GUI screen. If you accept the terms and

conditions, select “Yes” to get started. In this case, you do not need

to follow steps 3 and 4.

3Use jCursor k / n / l / h and jENTER to

enter your user name and password (up to 64

characters each) and then select “OK” .

“Please wait” appears followed by the confirmation

screen.

4Press jENTER.

•For a complete list of status messages that appear on the front panel

display and GUI screen, see “USB and network” (page 84).

1Rotate the TINPUT selector (or press

dUSB/NET and then xRHAPSODY) to

select “Rhapsody” as the input source.

•If the remaining term of your free trial account is less than seven

days, the number of remaining days is displayed in the GUI screen.

To proceed to step 2 (with the free trial service), press jENTER.

To sign up for Rhapsody®, see “Rhapsody Information” (page 65).

2Press jCursor k / n / l / h to select an

item to play back.

•To select an item, folder or file, press jCursor k

/ n.

•To confirm the selection, press jCursor h or

jENTER.

•To return to the previous menu, press jCursor

Using the Rhapsody® service (U.S.A. model only)

Prohibition

It is strictly prohibited to modify, reproduce, reverse-engineer or use this unit and/or built-in software for use other

than audiovisual purposes.

Account setup for Rhapsody®

From Rock, Pop, Cuntry, Jazz, Classical

- you name it-

Rhapsody lets you listen to it all.

Choose from millions of songs, tune into ad

free digital music channels and so much more.

Rhapsody

Start Free 30-day trial

Rhapsody User Name

Enter a string up to 64 characters

Playback of Rhapsody® contents

Rhapsody Music

Guide

Select a track from the lists organized by

category (artist, album, etc).

Rhapsody Channels Select a network radio channel from the lists

of the channels provided by Rhapsody®.

Search Use the software keyboard to search the

desired item (artist, album, etc) by keyword.

My Library Select a track from items (artist, album, etc)

added to “My Library” .

Input

DSP

Rhapsody Music Guide

Rhapsody Channels

My Library

Rhapsody

7ch Enhancer

Option Menu

52 En

Using the Rhapsody® service (U.S.A. model only)

3Press jENTER to start playback.

You can also perform the following operations with the

remote control.

•To play back the currently selected item (track, album, channel or

playlist) directly, press kPOP-UP MENU, press jCursor k / n to

select “Play” and then press jENTER.

•To display the track list of the album that contains the currently selected

track, press kPOP-UP MENU, press jCursor k / n to select

“Show Album Page” and then press jENTER. (This menu is not

available when you have selected a track from the track list of an album).

■Play information display

a Shuffle and repeat icons

b (playback)

c Album art (image of CD jacket, etc) or channel logo

d Elapsed time, progress bar, total time

e Song title, artist name, album title

•You can switch the information displayed on the front panel display by

pressing EINFO (or fINFO) (page 26).

•Album arts or channel logos are available only when the selected service

provides image data.

1Select the desired Rhapsody® item.

2Press kPOP-UP MENU.

•Available pop-up menu items vary depending on the menu level or

selected item.

3Press jCursor k / n to select the desired

operation and then press jENTER.

•Select “Add Track to My Library” to add the

currently selected track to “My Library” .

•Select “Add Album to My Library” to add the

currently selected album to “My Library” .

•Select “Add Channel to My Library” to add the

currently selected channel to “My Library” .

4To exit the pop-up menu, press kPOP-UP

MENU.

•To remove items from “My Library” , select the item under “My Library”

, press kPOP-UP MENU, press jCursor k / n to select “Remove

from My Library” and then press jENTER.

•These settings are also reflected in playback of USB and PC contents.

1Press sOPTION on the remote control

while “Rhapsody” is selected as the input

source.

2Press jCursor k / n to select “Shuffle” or

“Repeat”, press jENTER and then press

jCursor l / h to select the desired

playback style.

Shuffle:

•Select “Off” if you do not want to play back in

random order.

•Select “On” to play back songs in the selected list

in random order.

Repeat:

•Select “Off” if you do not want to play back

repeatedly.

•Select “One” to repeat each song.

•Select “All” to repeat all songs in the selected list.

3To exit the Option menu, press sOPTION.

Key Function

pPlay

sStop (pause for “Rhapsody Channels” )

ePause (unavailable for “Rhapsody

Channels”)

aSkip forward

bSkip backward (unavailable for “Rhapsody

Channels” )

Adding your favorite Rhapsody® items to

“My Library”

Input

DSP

dMade-to-order

Frankie Zipper

Road to India

Title

Artist

Album

00:15 04:23

Rhapsody

7ch Enhancer

Option Menu

Pop-Up Menu Shuffle/repeat playback

Input

DSP

Made-to-order

Frankie Zipper

Road to India

Title

Artist

Album

00:15 04:23

Rhapsody

7ch Enhancer

Option Menu

Pop-Up Menu

Add Album to My Library

Add Track to My Library

Pop-up menu

53 En

English

INTRODUCTION

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION APPENDIX

PREPARATION

BASIC

OPERATION

ADVANCED

OPERATION

Use this feature to select the HDMI OUT jack(s) to output

the input signals.

Press gHDMI OUT repeatedly to select the

active HDMI OUT jack(s).

•

•This unit automatically activates the HDMI OUT 1 jack when receiving

an HDMI control signal through the HDMI OUT 1 jack while the HDMI

OUT 1 jack is not selected.

You can operate the following functions of this unit with

the remote control of your TV when the TV (HDMI

control function supported) is connected to the HDMI

OUT 1 jack of this unit.

•Turning on this unit or to the standby (conjunction with

TV)

•Adjusting the volume

•Selecting a device to reproduce TV sounds (this unit or

TV)

•Even if your TV supports the HDMI control function, some functions

may not be available. For details, refer to the manual supplied with your

TV.

•If you connect this unit and Blu-ray player or DVD player (HDMI

control function supported) with HDMI, you can also control those

devices with the HDMI control function. For details, refer to the manual

supplied with each device.

•We suggest that you use products (TV, Blu-ray/DVD player, etc.) from

the same manufacturer.

•The HDMI control-compatible components include Panasonic VIERA

Link compatible TV, DVD player/recorder and Blu-ray Disc player.

(Steps 1 through 3 are required for the HDMI

control function setup.)

1Turn on all devices connected to this unit

with HDMI.

2Enable the HDMI control function on each

device.

For this unit, set “HDMI Control” to “On” (page 62).

For external devices, refer to the manual supplied

with each device.

3Turn off the TV and then turn on it again.

(Steps 4 through 6 are required for making the TV

learn linked devices. If the connections or

devices are switched, you need to carry out

these steps again.)

4Select this unit as the input source of the TV.

5Turn on the HDMI control device (Blu-ray or

DVD player) connected to this unit.

6Select the HDMI control device (Blu-ray or

DVD player) as the input source of this unit to

check the video input.

7Check if the HDMI control function works

(turn on this unit or adjust the volume level

using the remote control of the TV).

Note

<Note> •In case the HDMI control function does not work, check the

followings. Also, turning off (unplug) and turning on (plug) the TV

may be effective.

–The TV is connected to the HDMI OUT 1 jack of this unit.

–“HDMI Control” is set to “On” on this unit.

–The HDMI control function is enables on the TV.

•This unit automatically selects the TV scene (page 24) when you

select this unit as the device to reproduce TV sounds using the

remote control of your TV. That is, if you connect an audio output

jack of your TV to the AV 1 (OPTICAL) jack of this unit, you can

enjoy TV sounds with the specified sound field program soon.

The sleep timer is useful if you want to go to sleep while

this unit is playing or recording a source.

Press qSLEEP repeatedly to select the amount

of time.

The sleep timer setting changes as follows.

If the sleep timer is set, the SLEEP indicator on the front

panel display lights up.

To disable the sleep timer, select “Sleep Off”.

Other functions

Selecting the HDMI OUT jack

HDMI OUT1+2 Outputs the signals from both the HDMI

OUT 1 and HDMI OUT 2 jacks

simultaneously.

HDMI OUT 1 Outputs the signals from the HDMI OUT 1

jack.

HDMI OUT 2 Outputs the signals from the HDMI OUT 2

jack.

HDMI OFF Not to output any signals from the HDMI

OUT jacks. Select this setting when you do

not use the video monitor connected to one

of the HDMI OUT jacks.

Using the HDMI™ control function

HDMI OUT 1+2 HDMI OUT 1

HDMI OUT 2HDMI OUT OFF

Using the sleep timer

Sleep 120min. Sleep 90min.

Sleep 60min.Sleep 30min.Sleep Off

54 En

ADVANCED OPERATION

The Option menu allows users to configure various settings for each input source and reflect corresponding settings

automatically when an input source is switched. Also, you can view the signal information for certain input sources.

The procedure for setting the Option menu items is described below.

1Rotate the TINPUT selector (or press

dInput selection key) to select the

desired input source.

If you press dUSB/NET on the remote control,

press xSub-input selection key to select a

sub-input source.

2Press sOPTION on the remote control.

3Press jCursor k / n to select the desired

menu item and then press jENTER.

4Press jCursor k / n / l / h to select the

desired setting and then press jENTER

5To exit the Option menu, press sOPTION.

To return to the previous menu, press jRETURN.

Note

•In case jCursor k / n / l / h or other keys do not work after

closing the Option menu, press dInput selection key to

select the current input source again.

The following menu items are provided for each input

source.

Notes

*1 Only “Volume Trim” is available when no external device is connected

to the HDMI IN jack.

*2 “Shuffile” and “Repeat” are not available during the simple remote

mode.

Details of the menu items are as follows. The

configuration will be reflected to the input source

currently selected.

•The default settings are marked with “*”.

Volume Trim

Reduces any change in volume when switching input

sources by correcting volume differences between input

sources.

Decoder Mode

Selects DTS digital audio signals for reproduction.

Extended Surround

Selects whether to reproduce multi-channel (or 2-channel)

input signals in 6.1- or 7.1-channel when surround back

speakers are used.

Setting the option menu for each input source (Option menu)

Option menu items

Input source Menu items

HDMI1-4

AV1-4

V-AUX*1

Volume Trim, Decoder Mode,

Extended Surround, Signal Info

AV5-6

PHONO

Volume Trim

AUDIO1/2

MULTI CH

Volume Trim, Video Out

iPod (DOCK)*2 Volume Trim, Shuffle, Repeat

NET RADIO (USB/NET) Volume Trim, Signal Info

USB (USB/NET)

Rhapsody (USB/NET)

Volume Trim, Signal Info, Shuffle,

Repeat

PC (USB/NET) Volume Trim, Signal Info, Shuffle,

Repeat, Refresh

Input

DSP

Volume Trim

Decoder Mode

Extended Surround

Signal Info

Option Menu

HDMI 1

Straight

BLUETOOTH (DOCK) Volume Trim, Connect/Disconnect,

Pairing

TUNER Volume Trim, Audio Mode, Auto

Preset, Clear Preset

SIRIUS Volume Trim, Clear Preset, Parental

Lock

XM Volume Trim, Clear Preset

Input source: All

Adjustable range: –6.0dB to 0.0dB* to +6.0dB

(in 0.5 dB steps)

Input source: HDMI1-4, AV1-4, V-AUX

Choices: Auto*, DTS

Auto Automatically selects audio input signals.

DTS Selects DTS signals only. Other input signals

are not reproduced.

Input source: HDMI1-4, AV1-4, V-AUX

Choices: Auto*, PLIIxMovie, PLIIxMusic, EX/ES, Off

Auto Automatically selects the most suitable

decoder if a flag for reproducing surround back

channel is present, and reproduces the signals

in 6.1- or 7.1-channel.

Input source Menu items

55 En

Setting the option menu for each input source (Option menu)

English

INTRODUCTION

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION APPENDIX

PREPARATION

BASIC

OPERATION

ADVANCED

OPERATION

Signal Info

Displays information on audio and video signals on the

GUI screen and front panel display. You can change items

to be displayed using jCursor k / n.

•Audio information

•

Notes

•“No Signal” is displayed when no signals are input and “---” is displayed

when signals that this unit cannot recognize are input.

•The bit rate may vary during playback.

•Video information

•

•HDMI error message

(appears only when an error has occurred)

•

Audio Mode

Sets FM (or HD Radio) broadcasting receiving mode.

Note

•(U.S.A. model only)

Select “Auto” to tune into HD Radio stations. When “Mono” is selected,

you can tune into analog stations only.

Auto Preset

Automatically detects FM radio stations and registers

them as preset stations (page 31).

•(U.S.A. model only)

Automatically detects FM and AM HD Radio stations and analog FM

radio stations and registers them as preset stations.

Clear Preset

Clears preset station (TUNER: page 32, XM: page 37,

SIRIUS: page 41).

Parental Lock

Set the Parental Lock (page 42).

Shuffle

Changes the shuffle playback style.

•This setting is shared among the USB/NET sub-input sources (USB, PC

and Rhapsody). For example, the playback style configured for “USB” is

also reflected in “PC” and “Rhapsody”.

Repeat

Changes the repeat playback style.

•This setting is shared among the USB/NET sub-input sources (USB, PC

and Rhapsody). For example, the playback style configured for “USB” is

also reflected in “PC” and “Rhapsody”.

PLIIx

Movie

Always reproduces signals in 7.1-channel

using the PLIIxMovie decoder whether or not

surround back channel signals are contained.

You can select this parameter when two

surround back speakers are connected.

PLIIx

Music

Always reproduces signals in 6.1- or 7.1-

channel using the PLIIxMusic decoder whether

or not surround back channel signals are

contained. You can select this parameter when

one or two surround back speakers are

connected.

EX/ES Automatically selects the most suitable

decoder for input signals whether or not the

flag for reproducing surround back channel is

present, and always reproduces signals in 6.1-

channel.

Off Always reproduces original signals whether or

not the flag for reproducing surround back

channel is present.

Input source: HDMI1-4, AV1-4, V-AUX, USB (USB/NET), NET

RADIO (USB/NET), PC (USB/NET), Rhapsody

(USB/NET)

Format Format of digital audio signals.

Channel The number of input signal channels

(front/surround/LFE).

For example, if input signal channels are

3 front channels, 2 surrounds and LFE,

“3/2/0.1” is displayed.

If a channel that cannot be expressed as

the above, a total number of channels

such as “5.1ch” may be displayed.

Sampling

Frequency

The sampling frequency per second in

analog-to-digital conversion.

Bitrate The bit rate of input signal per second.

Video In Format and resolution of video input

signal.

Video Out Format and resolution of video output

signal.

Message Error messages about HDMI signals and

HDMI components. See the following for

details of the error messages.

HDCP Error HDCP authentication failed.

Device Over The number of HDMI components

connected is over the limit.

Out of Res. The connected monitor is not compatible

with the video input signal.

Input source: TUNER

Choices: Auto*, Mono

Auto Receives in stereo mode by priority.

Mono Receives in monaural mode. You can get a

better reception in monaural mode.

Input source: TUNER

Input source: TUNER, XM, SIRIUS

Input source: SIRIUS

Input source: iPod (DOCK), USB (USB/NET), PC (USB/NET),

Rhapsody (USB/NET)

Choices: iPod (DOCK): Off*, Songs, Albums

USB (USB/NET), PC (USB/NET), Rhapsody

(USB/NET): Off*, On

Input source: iPod (DOCK), USB (USB/NET), PC (USB/NET),

Rhapsody (USB/NET)

Choices: Off*, One, All

56 En

Setting the option menu for each input source (Option menu)

Refresh

Updates the PC server list displayed in the GUI screen

(page 48).

Connect / Disconnect

Connects to or disconnects from a Bluetooth component

(page 46).

Pairing

Performs pairing of this unit and a Bluetooth component

(page 46).

Video Out

Specifies a video signal to be output during an audio

reproduction. For details, see “Selecting a video signal to

be output during an audio reproduction” on this page.

This function enables this unit to output video signals

when “AUDIO 1”, “AUDIO 2” or “MULTI CH” is

selected as the input source. Follow the procedure below

to select the video to be output during an audio

reproduction.

1Rotate the TINPUT selector (or press

dInput selection keys) to select “AUDIO

1”, “AUDIO 2” or “MULTI CH” as the input

source.

2Press sOPTION on the remote control.

The Option menu for the selected input source is

displayed.

3Press jCursor k / n to select “Video Out”

and then press jENTER.

4Press jCursor l / h to select a video input

jack to be used during an audio

reproduction.

–AV1-2 (COMPONENT VIDEO)

–AV3-6 (VIDEO)

–Off (no video output)

5To exit the Option menu, press sOPTION.

Input source: PC (USB/NET)

Input source: BLUETOOTH (DOCK)

Input source: AUDIO 1/2, MULTI CH

Choices: AV 1 t o AV 6 , O f f *

Selecting a video signal to be output

during an audio reproduction

Video;;;;;;Off

57 En

English

INTRODUCTION

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION APPENDIX

PREPARATION

BASIC

OPERATION

ADVANCED

OPERATION

You can call the Setup menu using the remote control and change the settings of various menus.

For details, read “Basic operation of the Setup menu” first, and see the respective pages.

Operating various settings for this unit (Setup menu)

Menu/Submenu Function Page

Speaker Setup Sets items for speakers. 59

Auto Setup (YPAO) Automatically adjusts output characteristics of speakers. 59

Manual Setup Manually adjusts output characteristics of speakers. 59

Speaker Configuration Sets speaker configurations, such as connection status of speaker and a size of the

connected speaker (sound reproduction capacity), suitable for the listening

environment.

Speaker Level Separately adjusts volume of each speaker. 61

Speaker Distance Adjusts timing at which each speaker outputs sound based on distances between

speakers and the listening position.

Equalizer Selects an equalizer that adjusts speaker output characteristics. 61

Test Tone Generates test tones. 61

Sound Setup Sets various items for sound outputs. 62

Dynamic Range Adjusts dynamic ranges of speakers and headphones. 62

Lipsync Adjusts delay in output timing between video signals and audio signals. 62

HDMI OUT1 Fine adjusts the delay time of automatic lipsync applied when only the HDMI

OUT 1 jack is used or when both the HDMI OUT 1 and HDMI OUT 2 jacks are

used.

HDMI OUT2 Fine adjusts the delay time of automatic lipsync applied when only the HDMI

OUT 2 jack is used.

ANALOG MONITOR OUT Adjusts the delay time applied when only the analog MONITOR OUT

(COMPONENT VIDEO or VIDEO) jacks are used.

58 En

Operating various settings for this unit (Setup menu)

Function Setup Sets various items for HDMI and display. 62

HDMI Sets various items for input sources. 62

HDMI Control Selects on or off of the HDMI control function when a component that supports

the HDMI control function is connected to the HDMI OUT 1 jack of this unit.

Standby Through Selects on or off of output of HDMI signals input from the HDMI 1-4 jacks or

HDMI IN (VIDEO AUX) jack to the active HDMI OUT jack(s) when this unit is

on standby.

Audio Output Selects this unit or a component connected to the HDMI OUT 1 jack of this unit

for reproducing sound signals.

Resolution Sets resolution of the HDMI output that is converted from analogy visual input

signals.

Aspect Set an aspect ratio of images reproduced by HDMI signals converted from analog

video input signals.

Display Sets items for a video monitor or the front panel display. 63

Dimmer Sets brightness of the front panel display. 63

Front Panel Display Scroll Selects the way to display characters on the front panel display. 63

GUI Position Adjusts top and bottom positions of the GUI screen displayed on the video

monitor.

Volume Sets items for volumes. 63

Adaptive DRC Adjusts the dynamic range (difference between the maximum volume and the

minimum volume) in conjunction with the volume level.

Max Volume Sets the maximum volume level so that the volume will not be accidentally

increased.

Initial Volume Sets the volume at the time this unit is turned on. 64

Input Rename Changes input source names to be displayed on the GUI screen or the front panel

display.

Zone Sets the maximum volume level and initial volume level of Zone2/3. 64

Zone2 Max Volume Sets the maximum volume level of Zone2. 64

Zone2 Initial Volume Sets the volume level of Zone2 applied when this unit is turned on. 64

Zone3 Max Volume Sets the maximum volume level of Zone3. 64

Zone3 Initial Volume Sets the volume level of Zone3 applied when this unit is turned on. 64

Network Sets items for network features. 64

IP Address Sets the network parameters (IP address, etc) manually. 64

MAC Address Filter Sets MAC address filter to restrict access to this unit via LAN. 64

Network Standby Selects whether or not to accept the commands via network when this unit is on

standby.

Information Displays network information. 65

Rhapsody Information Sets your Rhapsody® account. 65

Account Status Displays the registration status of your Rhapsody® account. 65

Rhapsody Free Trial Subscribes to the Rhapsody® service using 30-day free trial. 65

Remove Account Removes your Rhapsody® account. 65

DSP Parameter Sets parameters for the sound field programs. 65

Memory Guard Protects some settings against accidental alteration. 68

Menu/Submenu Function Page

59 En

Operating various settings for this unit (Setup menu)

English

INTRODUCTION

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION APPENDIX

PREPARATION

BASIC

OPERATION

ADVANCED

OPERATION

The Setup menu screen appears on both the GUI screen

and front panel display.

GUI screen

Front panel display

In this section, procedures of setting menus using the

video monitor are described.

1Press iON SCREEN on the remote control.

The GUI screen appears on the video monitor.

2Press jCursor n to select “Setup” and then

press jENTER.

The Setup menu appears on the video monitor.

3Press jCursor k / n to select the desired

menu then press jENTER.

Items of the selected menu are displayed.

Example (Function Setup)

•To return to the previous menu, press jRETURN.

4If necessary, press jCursor k / n to select

the desired submenu then press jENTER.

Example (Volume)

5Press jCursor k / n to select an item to edit

and then press jCursor l / h to change

the setting.

Some items in “Manual Setup” of “Speaker Setup”

take up a full screen. To display other items in

“Manual Setup”, press jCursor k / n.

Example (Speaker Configuration)

•To configure other items, repeat step 5.

6To turn off the GUI screen, press iON

SCREEN.

Note

•In case jCursor k / n / l / h or other keys do not work after

closing the Setup menu, press dInput selection key to

select the current input source again.

You can set various items for speakers. Two kinds of

adjustments are available. One is “Auto Setup” (YPAO)

for automatic adjustment and another is “Manual Setup”

for manual adjustment.

•The default settings are marked with “*”.

Automatically adjusts output characteristics of speakers to

obtain optimum balance for the output sound based on

positions and performances of the speakers and acoustic

characteristics or the room, which are automatically

measured. For details on operations, see page 21.

Adjusts output characteristics of speakers based on

manually set parameters.

After “Auto Setup” (YPAO) is performed, you can check

automatically adjusted parameters in the “Manual Setup”

menu. Fine adjust the parameters for your preference if

necessary.

■Speaker Configuration

Sets speaker configurations, such as connection status of

speaker and a size of the connected speaker (sound

reproduction capacity), suitable for the listening

environment.

•The speaker configuration includes items for defining a speaker size:

“Large” or “Small”. “Large” and “Small” refer to speakers with woofer

diameters 16 cm or larger and smaller than 16 cm, respectively.

Basic operation of the Setup menu

Speaker Setup

Sound Setup

Function Setup

DSP Parameter

Memory Guard

Setup Menu

;SpeakerSetup

HDMI

Display

Volume

Input Rename

Zone

Network

Rhapsody Information

Function Setup

Off

+16.5dB

Off

Volume

Adaptive DRC

Max Volume

Initial Volume

Speaker Setup

Auto Setup

Manual Setup

Speaker Configuration

Front Speaker

LargeSmall

60 En

Operating various settings for this unit (Setup menu)

Extra Speaker Assignment

Selects the application for the EXTRA SP (SP1/SP2)

terminals.

Note

•

When setting “Extra Speaker Assignment” to “Zone2” or “Presence”, surround

back channel signals for main unit are separately output from other channels.

•

When setting “Extra Speaker Assignment” to “Zone2 + Zone3”, surround and

surround back channel signals for main unit are separately output from other

channels.

LFE / Bass Out

Selects speaker(s) for outputting low-frequency

components of the LFE (low-frequency effect sound)

channel or other channels. The output status is as follows.

LFE channel signals

Low-frequency components of other channel signals

Front Speaker

Sets the sizes of front left and right speakers.

Note

•If “LFE / Bass Out” is set to “Front”, “Front Speaker” automatically

switches to “Large” even when it is set to “Small”.

Center Speaker

Sets the size of center speaker.

Surround Speaker

Sets sizes of left and right surround speakers.

•When “None” is selected, the sound field programs automatically enter

the Virtual CINEMA DSP mode.

Surround Back Speaker

Sets sizes of left and right surround back speakers.

Choices: Zone2*, Zone2 + Zone3, Presence, None

Zone2 Assigns the SP1 terminals for Zone2 speakers

and disables the SP2 terminals.

Zone2 +

Zone3

Assigns the SP1 terminals for Zone2 speakers

and SP2 terminals for Zone3 speakers.

Presence Assigns the SP1 terminals for presence

speakers and disables the SP2 terminals.

None Disables the EXTRA SP (SP1/SP2)

terminals.

Choices: Subwoofer, Front, Both*

Parameter Subwoofer Front

speakers

Other

speakers

Subwoofer Output Not output Not output

Front Not output Output Not output

Both Output Not output Not output

Parameter Subwoofer Front

speakers

Other

speakers

Subwoofer [1] [2] [2]

Front Not output [3] [2]

Both [3] [4] [2]

[1] Outputs low-frequency components of the channel of speaker,

the size of which is set to “Small”.

[2] Outputs low-frequency components when the sizes of speakers

are set to “Large”.

[3] Outputs low-frequency components of the front left and right

channels and the channel of speaker, the size of which is set to

“Small”.

[4] Outputs low-frequency components of the front left and right

channels.

Choices: Small, Large*

Small Select this when small speakers are

connected. Low-frequency components of the

front left and right channels are output from a

subwoofer.

Large Select this when large speakers are

connected.

Choices: None, Small*, Large

None Select this when no center speaker is

connected. Center channel signals are spread

to front left and right speakers.

Small Select this when a small center speaker is

connected. Low-frequency components of

center channel are output from a subwoofer.

If a subwoofer is not connected they are

output from front speakers.

Large Select this when a large center speaker is

connected.

Choices: None, Small*, Large

None Select this when no surround speakers are

connected. Surround channel signals are

spread to front left and right speakers.

“Surround Back Speaker” automatically

switches to “None” when this is selected.

Small Select this when small surround speakers are

connected. Low-frequency components of

surround channels are output from a

subwoofer. If a subwoofer is not connected

they are output from front speakers.

Large Select this when large surround speakers are

connected.

Choices: None, Large x 1, Small x 1, Large x 2, Small x 2*

None Select this when no surround back speaker

are connected. Surround back channel signals

are output from the surround L/R speakers

and subwoofer. If the subwoofer is disabled,

they are output from the surround L/R

speakers and front speakers.

Large x 1 Select this when one large surround back

speaker is connected.

Small x 1 Select this when one small surround back

speaker is connected.

Large x 2 Select this when two large surround back

speakers are connected.

Small x 2 Select this when two small surround back

speakers are connected.

61 En

Operating various settings for this unit (Setup menu)

English

INTRODUCTION

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION APPENDIX

PREPARATION

BASIC

OPERATION

ADVANCED

OPERATION

•When “Surround Back Speaker” is set to “None”, “PLIIx Movie”,

“PLIIx Music” and “PLIIx Game” of the surround decode mode

(page 29) are not available.

Bass Crossover Frequency

Sets the lower limit of the low-frequency component

output from a speaker with a size set to “Small” (Small x

1, Small x 2) Sound with a frequency below that limit is

output from a subwoofer or front speakers.

If your subwoofer has a volume control or a crossover

frequency control, set the volume to half or the crossover

frequency at the maximum.

Subwoofer Phase

Sets the phase of your subwoofer if bass sounds are

lacking or unclear.

■Speaker Level

Separately adjusts volume of each speaker so that the

sounds form speakers are at the same volume at the

listening position. Items to be displayed vary depending

on the number of speakers connected.

•When only one surround back speaker is connected, “SB” appears

instead of “SBL” and “SBR”.

•You can adjust the volume listening to test tones when you set “Test

Tone” to “On” (on this page).

•If your subwoofer has a volume control or a crossover frequency control,

set the volume to half or the crossover frequency at the maximum.

■Speaker Distance

Adjusts timing at which each speaker outputs sound so

that sounds from speakers reach the listening position at

the same time. Set unit (Unit) first and set the distance of

each speaker.

Unit

FR.L / FR.R / CNTR / SUR.L / SUR.R / SBL / SBR /

SWFR / PR.L / PR.R

•Available items differ depending on the “Speaker Configuration” settings

(page 59).

•When only one surround back speaker is connected, “SB” appears

instead of “SBL” and “SBR”.

■Equalizer

Adjusts sound quality and tone using a parametric graphic

equalizer.

EQ Type Select

Selects an equalizer type.

GEQ

Adjusts sound quality of each speaker using a graphic

equalizer. The graphic equalizer of this unit can adjust

signal levels in 7 frequency ranges.

To adjust the signal level within each range, press

jCursor l / h to select the desired speaker while

“Channel” is selected, press jCursor k / n to select the

desired frequency band and then press jCursor l / h

to adjust the signal level.

■Test Tone

Switches between on and off of an oscillator that generates

test tones. When “On” is selected, you can adjust the

settings of “Manual Setup” while listening to a test tone.

Choices: 40Hz, 60Hz, 80Hz*, 90Hz, 100Hz, 110Hz, 120Hz,

160Hz, 200Hz

Choices: Normal*, Reverse

Normal Select this not to change the phase of your

subwoofer.

Reverse Select this to reverse the phase of your

subwoofer.

Adjustable range: –10.0dB to +10.0dB (0.5dB step)

Defaults: 0dB (FR.L, FR.R, SWFR, PR.L, PR.R)

–1.0dB (CNTR, SUR.L, SUR.R, SBL, SBR)

Choices: feet (ft)*, meters (m)

feet (ft) Displays the speaker distance in feet.

meters (m) Displays the speaker distance in meters.

Adjustable range: 0.30m to 24.00m (1.0ft to 80.0ft)

Defaults: 3.00m (10.0ft) (FR.L, FR.R, SWFR, PR.L,

PR.R)

2.60m (8.5ft) (CNTR)

2.40m (8.0ft) (SUR.L, SUR.R, SBL, SBR)

Choices: Auto PEQ, GEQ*, Off

Auto PEQ Uses a parametric equalizer selected in

“Auto Setup”. Characteristics of the

currently used parametric equalizer are

displayed below “Auto PEQ”.

GEQ Uses a graphic equalizer. Press jENTER

to adjust the characteristics of the graphic

equalizer.

Off Not use a graphic equalizer.

Channels Front Left, Front Right, Center, Surround Left,

Surround Right, Surround Back Left, Surround

Back Right

Choices: 63Hz, 160Hz, 400Hz, 1kHz, 2.5kHz, 6.3kHz,

16kHz

Adjustable range: –6.0dB to 0dB* to +6.0dB (0.5dB step)

Choices: Off*, On

Off Not generate test tones.

On Generates test tones.

62 En

Operating various settings for this unit (Setup menu)

You can set various items for sound outputs.

■Dynamic Range

Selects the dynamic range adjustment method for

reproducing bitstream signals.

■Lipsync

Adjusts delay between video output and audio output.

This unit automatically adjusts the delay (automatic

lipsync) when a TV that supports the automatic lipsync is

connected to the HDMI OUT 1 or HDMI OUT 2 jack of

this unit and HDMI signals are output only from the

corresponding HDMI OUT jack.

HDMI OUT1

Displays the delay time adjusted by automatic lipsync for

HDMI signals output from the HDMI OUT 1 jack. To fine

adjust the delay time, set an offset time in the “Offset”

field. This offset time is also applied to the signals output

from the HDMI OUT 2 jack when both the HDMI OUT 1

and HDMI OUT 2 jacks are active.

HDMI OUT2

Displays the delay time adjusted by automatic lipsync for

HDMI signals output from the HDMI OUT 2 jack. To fine

adjust the delay time, set an offset time in the “Offset”

field.

ANALOG MONITOR OUT

Adjusts the delay time applied when only the analog

MONITOR OUT (COMPONENT VIDEO or VIDEO)

jacks are used.

You can set various items for HDMI and display.

You can set items for HDMI.

■HDMI Control

Selects on or off of the HDMI control function when a

component that supports the HDMI control function is

connected to the HDMI OUT 1 jack of this unit. When this

parameter is set to “On”, this unit output signals input

from the HDMI 1-4 jacks or HDMI IN (VIDEO AUX)

jack to the video monitor even when this unit is on

standby.

•The BHDMI THROUGH indicator lights up in the following cases

while this unit is on standby.

–when the HDMI control function is on

–when the HDMI signal standby-through function is currently working

•When “HDMI Control” is set to “On”, this unit consumes 1 to 3 watts of

power depending on a condition of an HDMI signal passing through this

unit.

■Standby Through

Selects on or off of output of HDMI signals input from the

HDMI 1-4 jacks or HDMI IN (VIDEO AUX) jack to the

active HDMI OUT jack(s) when this unit is on standby.

When this parameter is set to “On”, this unit output signals

input from the HDMI 1-4 jacks or HDMI IN (VIDEO

AUX) jack to the video monitor(s) even when this unit is

on standby.

•This parameter is not available when “HDMI Control” is set to “On”.

•To enables HDMI signal standby-through output, any one of the input

sources connected to the HDMI 1-4 jacks or HDMI IN (VIDEO AUX)

jack must be selected before switching to standby.

•When “Standby Through” is set to “On”, the BHDMI THROUGH

indicator lights up. In this state, the amount of power consumption in the

standby mode increases.

■Audio Output

Selects this unit or a component connected to the HDMI

OUT 1 jack of this unit for reproducing sound signals

input from the HDMI 1-4 jacks or HDMI IN (VIDEO

AUX) jack.

Sound Setup

Choices: Min/Auto, STD, Max*

Min/Auto (Min) Sets the dynamic range suitable for

low volume or a quiet environment, such as

at night, for bitstream signals except for

Dolby TrueHD signals.

(Auto) Adjusts the dynamic range for Dolby

TrueHD signals based on input signal

information.

STD Sets the standard dynamic range

recommended for regular home use.

Max Outputs sound without adjusting the

dynamic range of the input signals.

Adjustable range: 0* to 240ms (1 ms step)

Function Setup

HDMI

Choices: On, Off*

On Enables the HDMI control function.

Off Disables the HDMI control function.

Choices: On, Off*

On Outputs the HDMI signals to the active

HDMI OUT jack(s)

Off Not output the HDMI signals to the HDMI

OUT 1/2 jacks.

Choices: Amplifier*, TV, Amplifier + TV

Amplifier Outputs HDMI sound signals form the

speakers connected to this unit.

63 En

Operating various settings for this unit (Setup menu)

English

INTRODUCTION

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION APPENDIX

PREPARATION

BASIC

OPERATION

ADVANCED

OPERATION

Note

•Signal formats of audio and visual signals output from this unit to the TV

vary depending on specifications of the monitor.

•This parameter is not available when “HDMI Control” is set to “On”.

■Resolution

Upscales the resolution of HDMI output that is converted

from analog video input signals and output from the

HDMI OUT 1/2 jacks.

Notes

•Resolution of the HDMI output converted from 720p or 1080i analog

video signals cannot be upscaled.

•When a video monitor is connected to one of the HDMI OUT 1/2 jacks

and the corresponding HDMI OUT jack is selected (page 53), this unit

automatically detects a resolution that the monitor supports. An asterisk

(*) appears on the left of detected resolution.

•When a video monitor is connected to both of the HDMI OUT 1/2 jacks

and “HDMI OUT 1+2” is selected (page 53), this unit automatically

selects a resolution depending on the lower-resolution monitor.

•If this unit cannot detect the resolution that the monitor supports, set

“MON.CHK” in the advanced setup menu to “SKIP” (page 73) and try

again.

■Aspect

Sets a horizontal to vertical ratio (aspect ratio) of images

reproduced by HDMI signals output from the HDMI OUT

1/2 jacks when the HDMI signals are converted from

analog video input signals by a video conversion function.

Notes

•You cannot change the aspect ratio of the screen when “Resolution” is set

to “Through”.

•This setting is not effective for inputs with the aspect ratio other than 4:3.

•You cannot obtain an effect of the aspect ratio when visual signals are

input from the HDMI 1-4 jacks or HDMI IN (VIDEO AUX) jack or

when 720p, 1080i or 1080p signals are input.

You can set items for a video monitor and the front panel

display.

■Dimmer

Sets brightness of the front panel display. As the value is

lowered, the brightness of the front panel display is

darkened.

Note

•The brightness of display does not become bright in Pure Direct mode

even if the value is increased.

■Front Panel Display Scroll

Selects the way to scroll the screen when a total number of

characters exceed a display area of the front panel display.

■GUI Position

Adjusts the position of the GUI screen displayed on the

video monitor. To move the screen up (or to the right), set

this value larger. To move the screen down (or to the left),

set this value smaller.

You can set items for volumes.

■Adaptive DRC

Adjust the dynamic range in conjunction with the volume

level. This feature is useful when you are listening at

lower volumes or at night. When this function is enabled,

the dynamic range is adjusted as follows.

When the volume level is low: narrow the dynamic range

When the volume level is high: widen the dynamic range

•This setting is also effective for headphones.

TV Outputs HDMI sound signals from the

speakers of a TV connected to the HDMI

OUT 1/2 jacks of this unit. Sound output

from the speakers connected to this unit is

muted.

Amplifier +

Outputs HDMI sound signals from the

speakers connected to this unit and the

speakers of a TV connected HDMI OUT 1/2

jacks of this unit.

Choices: Through*, 480p(576p), 720p, 1080i, 1080p

Choices: Through*, 16:9, Smart Zoom

Through Outputs the video signals without changing

the aspect ratio.

16:9 Outputs the video signals that displays 4:3

images on a 16:9 TV with black bands on

the right and left sides of the TV screen.

Smart Zoom Outputs the video signals that displays 4:3

images on a 16:9 TV by stretching right and

left of images to fit on the TV screen.

Display

Adjustable range: –4 to 0*

Choices: Continuous*, Once

Continuous Repeatedly displays all characters by

scrolling.

Once Displays all characters by scrolling once,

halts scrolling and then displays first 14

characters.

Adjustable range: –5 to 0* to +5 (vertical/horizontal direction)

Volume

Choices: Auto, Off*

Auto Adjusts the dynamic range automatically.

Off Not adjust the dynamic range automatically.

Volume : highVolume : low

Input levelInput level

Output level

Auto

Off Off

Auto

64 En

Operating various settings for this unit (Setup menu)

■Max Volume

Sets the maximum volume level so that the volume will

not be accidentally increased. For example, you can adjust

the volume between –80.0 dB and –5.0 dB (or Mute) when

you set this parameter to “–5.0dB”. The volume increases

to the maximum level when this parameter is set to +16.5

dB (default).

■Initial Volume

Sets the volume at the time this unit is turned on. When

this parameter is set to “Off”, the volume level used when

this unit was set to standby is applied.

Note

•When you set “Max Volume” and “Initial Volume” the setting of “Max

Volume” becomes effective. For example, when you set “Max Volume”

to “–30.0dB” and “Init. Volume” to “0.0dB”, the volume is

automatically set to “–30.0dB” at the next time this unit is turned on.

Changes input source names to be displayed on the front

panel display.

Selecting a name to be displayed from templates

Press jCursor k / n to select the input source name to

edit and then press jCursor l / h to select a new

name from the templates (Blu-ray, DVD, SetTopBox,

etc.).

Entering an original name

Press jCursor k / n to select the input source name to

edit and then press jENTER. Enter up to 9 characters

by selecting one character at a time with the following key

operations.

The following characters are available for input.

A to Z, 0 to 9, a to z, symbols (#, *, –, +, etc.) and space

Sets the maximum volume level and initial volume level

of Zone2/3.

•The menu items for Zone2 are available only when “Extra Speaker

Assignment” is set to “Zone2” or “Zone2 + Zone3” (page 60).

•The menu items for Zone3 are available only when “Extra Speaker

Assignment” is set to “Zone2 + Zone3” (page 60).

■Zone2/3 Max Volume

Sets the maximum volume level of Zone2/3, so that the

volume will not be accidentally increased. For example,

you can adjust the volume between –80.0 dB and –5.0 dB

when you set this parameter to “–5.0dB”.

■Zone2/3 Initial Volume

Use this feature to set the volume level of Zone2/3 when

the power of Zone2/3 unit is turned on. When this

parameter is set to “Off”, the volume level used at the time

when the Zone2/3 unit was set to standby is applied.

Note

•The “Zone2 Max Volume” or “Zone3 Max Volume” setting takes priority

over the “Zone2 Initial Volume” or “Zone3 Initial Volume” setting. For

example, if you set “Zone2 Max Volume” to “–30.0dB” and “Zone2

Initial Volume” to “0.0dB”, the volume is automatically set to “–30.0dB”

at the next time the Zone2 unit is turned on.

You can set items for network features.

■IP Address

Sets the network parameters (IP address, etc).

DHCP

Select whether or not this unit obtain the network

parameters (IP address, subnet mask, default gateway,

primary DNS server and secondary DNS server) from the

DHCP server of the connected network.

IP Address

Use this parameter to specify the IP address assigned to

this unit. This value must not be the same as the one used

for other devices in the target network.

Subnet Mask

Use this parameter to specify the subnet mask value

assigned to this unit.

Default Gateway

Use this parameter to specify the IP address of the default

gateway.

DNS Server (P) / DNS Server (S)

Use this parameter to specify the IP address of the primary

and secondary DNS (Domain Name System) servers.

•If you have only one DNS address, enter the DNS address in “DNS

Server (P)”. If you have two or more DNS addresses, enter one of them in

“DNS Server (P)” and another in “DNS Server (S)”.

■MAC Address Filter

Sets MAC address filter to restrict access to this unit via

LAN.

MAC Address Filter

Select whether or not to use the MAC address filter

function.

Adjustable range: –30.0dB to +15.0dB, +16.5dB* (5.0 dB step)

Adjustable range: Off*, Mute, –80.0dB to +16.5dB (0.5 dB step)

Input Rename

jCursor l / hSelects a character to edit.

jCursor k / nSelects a character to enter.

jENTER Enters a selected character.

Zone

Adjustable range: –30.0dB to +15.0dB, +16.5dB* (5.0 dB step)

Adjustable range: Off*, Mute, –80.0dB to +16.5dB (0.5 dB step)

Network

Choices: On*, Off

On Select this setting when this unit can obtain

the network parameters from the DHCP

server of the connected network.

Off Select this setting when you set the network

parameters manually.

Choices: Off*, On

Off Disables the MAC address filter function.

65 En

Operating various settings for this unit (Setup menu)

English

INTRODUCTION

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION APPENDIX

PREPARATION

BASIC

OPERATION

ADVANCED

OPERATION

MAC Address 1-10

Specify MAC addresses of network devices that are

permitted to access to this unit when “MAC Address

Filter” is set to “On”.

■Network Standby

Selects whether or not to accept the commands via

network when this unit is on standby.

•When “Network Standby” is set to “On”, the amount of power

consumption in the standby mode increases.

■Information

Displays the network parameters (IP address, etc.) or

vTuner ID assigned to this unit.

You can set your Rhapsody® account.

For information about the Rhapsody® service and how to

play back Rhapsody® contents, see “Using the Rhapsody®

service” (page 51).

■Account Status

Displays the registration status of your Rhapsody®

account. If “Not Available” appears, check the network

settings.

■Sign In

Use this menu to register your Rhapsody® account with

your user name and password provided by Rhapsody®. To

start registration, follow steps 3 and 4 in “Account setup

for Rhapsody®”(page 51).

If an error message appears (page 84), confirm your user

name and password and then try again.

■Rhapsody Free Trial

Use this menu to subscribe to the Rhapsody® service

using 30-day free trial. To subscribe to the free-trial

service, read the description on the GUI screen and then

select “Yes” if you accept the terms and conditions.

If you have subscribed to the free trial service, the

remaining service days and account number (required for

receiving Rhapsody® support) appear on the GUI screen.

■Remove Account

Removes your Rhapsody® account.

Although the field sound programs would satisfy you as

they are with the default parameters, you can arrange

sound effect or decoders suitable for acoustical conditions

of sources or rooms by setting the parameters.

1Press jCursor k / n to select “DSP

Parameter” and then press jENTER.

2Press jCursor k / n to select “Program

Name” and then press jCursor l / h to

select a sound field program to edit.

3Press jCursor k / n to select a parameter to

edit and then press jCursor l / h to

change the setting.

•Repeat steps 2 and 3 to change other sound field program

parameters.

DSP Level

Fine adjusts an effect level (level of the sound field effect

to be added). You can adjust the level of the sound field

effect while checking sound levels. Adjust “DSP Level” as

follows.

•The effect sound is too soft.

•There are no differences between effects of the sound

field programs.

→Increase the effect level.

•The sound is dull.

•The sound field effect is added too much.

→Reduce the effect level.

On Permit access to this unit only from network

devices with the specified MAC addresses.

Choices: Off*, On

Off Not accept the commands via network.

On Accept the commands via network.

Rhapsody Information

DSP Parameter

To initialize the parameters of the selected sound field

program, press jCursor n repeatedly to select

“Initialize” and then press jCursor h. Then, press

jCursor h again to execute the initialization or

jCursor l to cancel it.

CINEMA DSP basic parameters

Adjustable range: –6dB to 0dB* to +3dB

Sci-Fi

PLIIx Movie

0dB

16ms

1.0

2ms

1.0

DSP Parameter

Program Name

Decode Type

DSP Level

P. Initial Delay

P. Room Size

Sur. Initial Delay

Sur. Room Size

Sound field parameters Set values

Sound field program

66 En

Operating various settings for this unit (Setup menu)

Dialogue Lift

Use this feature to adjust the vertical position of the

dialogues in movies. The ideal position of the dialogues is

at the center of the video monitor screen.

If the dialogues are heard at the lower position of the video

monitor screen, increase the value of “Dialogue Lift”.

When the value is set to zero, the position is at the lowest.

The position gets higher as you increase the value.

Notes

•This setting is available only when “Extra Speaker Assignment” is set to

“Presence” (page 60).

•You cannot move the dialogue position down from the initial dialogue

position.

3D DSP

When CINEMA DSP 3D is enabled, sets whether to use

sound field programs in 3D mode.

Note

•This setting is available only when “Extra Speaker Assignment” is set to

“Presence” (page 60).

■Parameters for adjusting early-reflected

sound

Initial Delay / P. Initial Delay / Sur. Initial Delay /

Sur. Back Initial Delay

Adjusts attenuation characteristics of early-reflected

sound. You can create a lively sound field (with a high

reverberant sound level) as you increase the value, and a

dead sound field (with a low reverberant sound level) as

you decrease the value. Creating either a lively sound field

or a dead sound field in an actual music hall is determined

by the acoustic absorption characteristics of reflection

surfaces. A dead sound field is created when the

attenuation time is short while a lively sound field is

created when the attenuation time is long.

•We recommended that you adjust the size of corresponding sound field

when you adjust the delay time.

■Parameters for specifying room size

Room Size / P. Room Size / Sur. Room Size / Sur.

Back Room Size

Produces different senses of sound expansion according to

room sizes specified. In a large size room such as a music

hall, the duration from when reflected sound is heard until

when the next reflected sound is heard is long. Thus,

different senses of sound expansion can be created by

changing the duration. 1.0 is the original room size. When

this parameter is set to 2.0, each side of the room is

defined as twice larger than the original room size.

Choices: 0* to 5

Choices: On*, Off

The ideal dialogue

position

Move up to the ideal

dialogue position

Sound field parameters for advanced

configurations

Adjustable range: 1 to 99ms (Initial Delay / P. Initial Delay), 1 to

49ms (Sur. Initial Delay / Sur. Back Initial

Delay)

Adjustable range: 0.1 to 2.0

Delay

Time

Level

Delay

Time

Level

Early-reflected

sound

Original source sound

Sound source

Reflecting

surface

Small = 1ms Large = 99ms

67 En

Operating various settings for this unit (Setup menu)

English

INTRODUCTION

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION APPENDIX

PREPARATION

BASIC

OPERATION

ADVANCED

OPERATION

■Parameters for defining attenuation

characteristics of early-reflected sound

Liveness / P. Liveness / Sur. Liveness / Sur. Back

Liveness

Adjusts the attenuation of reflected sound. You can create

a lively sound field (with a high reverberant sound level)

as you increase the value, and a dead sound field (with a

low reverberant sound level) as you decrease the value.

Creating either a lively sound field or a dead sound field in

an actual music hall is determined by the acoustic

absorption characteristics of reflection surfaces. A dead

sound field is created when the attenuation time is short

while a lively sound field is created when the attenuation

time is long.

■Parameters for adjusting reverberant sound

Reverb Time

Reverb Time parameter adjusts the attenuation time of the

rear reverberant sound based on the time that about 1kHz

reverberant sound takes for 60dB of attenuation.

Reverberant sound attenuates faster as you decrease the

value. Reverb Time adjustment allows you to create a

natural reverberant sound, by setting the attenuation time

longer for a sound source or room with less echo, or

shorter for a sound source or room with more echo.

Reverb Delay

Reverb Delay parameter adjusts the time difference

between the beginning of the direct sound and the

beginning of the reverberation sound. The larger the value,

the later the reverberation sound begins. Increasing the

value of Reverb Delay allows you to create a reverberant

sound in a wider area for the same Reverb Time.

Adjustable range: 0 to 10

Time

Level

Time

Early reflections

Source sound

Sound source

Small = 0.1 Large = 2.0

Time

Level

Small = 0 Large = 10

Time

Level

Source sound

Live

Dead

Large reflected

sound

Small reflected

sound

Adjustable range: 1.0 to 5.0s

Adjustable range: 0 to 250ms

Time Time

Small = 1.0s Large = 5.0s

Source sound

Rear reverberation Rear

reverberation

Early reflections

Short

reverberation

Long

reverberation

Sound source

Reverb Time Reverb Time

60dB 60dB

Time

Level

Source sound

Reverberation

(dB)

Reverb Delay Reverb Time

60dB

68 En

Operating various settings for this unit (Setup menu)

Reverb Level

Reverb Level parameter adjusts the reverberation sound

level. Increasing the value of Reverb Level makes the

reverbration sound level higher, which allows you to

create more echo.

■Parameter for MOVIE sound field programs

Decode Type

Selects the decoder type for use with the MOVIE sound

field programs.

Note

•You cannot select a decoder for the following MOVIE sound field

programs.

–Mono Movie

–Sports

–Action Game

–Roleplaying Game

■Parameter for 2ch Stereo

Direct

Automatically bypasses the DSP circuit and tone control

circuit when an analog sound source is selected as the

input source. You can enjoy a higher quality sound.

■Parameters for 7ch Stereo

Center Level / Surround L Level / Surround R

Level / Surround Back Level / Presence L Level /

Presence R Level

Adjusts the volume of the center, surround L/R, surround

back and presence L/R channels in the 7ch Stereo

program. The available parameters differ depending on the

setting of the speakers.

■Parameter for Straight Enhancer and 7ch

Enhancer

Effect Level

Adjusts the Compressed Music Enhancer effect level.

When the high-frequency signals of the source is

emphasized too much, set the effect level to “Low”. To

reduce the effect, set this parameter to “Low”.

You can customize decoder effects by setting the

following parameters. For details about the types of

decoders, see “Surround decode mode” (page 29).

■Parameter for PLIIx Music and PLII Music

Panorama

Adjusts the soundscape of the front sound field. Sends

stereo signals to the surround speakers as well as the front

speakers for a wraparound effect.

Dimension

Adjusts the difference in level between the front sound

field and the surround sound field. You can adjust the

difference in level created by the software being played

back to obtain the preferred sound balance. The surround

sound gets stronger as you make the value more negative

and the front sound gets stronger as you make the value

more positive.

Center Width

You can spread the center sound toward left and right

according to your preference. Set this parameter to 0 for

outputting the center sound from the center speaker only,

or to 7 for outputting it from the front left/right speaker.

■Parameter for Neo:6 Music

Center Image

Adjusts the front left and right channel output relative to

the center channel to make the center channel more or less

dominant as necessary.

Protects the Setup menu settings against accidental

alteration.

Note

•When this parameter is switched to “On”, “ ” appears at the top left

corner of the Setup menu screen.

Adjustable range: 0 to100%

Parameters for certain sound field

programs

Choices: PLIIx Movie (PLII Movie), Neo:6 Cinema

Choices: Auto*, Off

Auto Outputs sound by bypassing the DSP circuit and

tone control circuit when the “Bass” and “Treble”

tone controls are both set to 0 dB.

Off Do not bypass the DSP circuit and tone control.

Adjustable range: 0 to 100%

Time

Level

Source sound

Reverb Level

(dB)

Choices: High*, Low

Decoder parameters

Choices: Off*, On

Adjustable range: –3 to STD* to +3

Adjustable range: 0 to 3* to 7

Adjustable range: 0.0 to 0.3* to 1.0

Memory Guard

Choices: Off*, On

Off Not protect settings.

On Protects the Setup menu settings (except for

“Decode Type” in “DSP Parameter” and

“Memory Guard”).

69 En

English

INTRODUCTION

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION APPENDIX

PREPARATION

BASIC

OPERATION

ADVANCED

OPERATION

This unit allows you to configure a multi-zone audio system. This feature allows you to set this unit to reproduce separate

input sources in the main zone, second zone (Zone2) and third zone (Zone3). You can control this unit from the second

zone or third zone using the supplied remote control.

You need the following additional equipment to use the multi-zone functions of this unit:

•An infrared signal receiver in the second zone and/or third zone.

•An infrared signal emitter in the main zone. This emitter transmits infrared signals from the remote control to a CD

player or a DVD player, etc. in the main zone via the infrared signal receiver in the second zone and/or third zone.

•An amplifier and speakers in the second zone and/or third zone.

•Since there are many possible ways to connect and use this unit in a multi-zone configuration, we recommend that you consult with your nearest

authorized Yamaha dealer or service center about the Zone2/3 connections that best meet your requirements.

•Some Yamaha models can be directly connected to the REMOTE jacks of this unit. You may not need use an infrared signal emitter for these products. Up

to 6 components can be connected using monaural analog mini cables or via an IR flashers. For details about connections, see “Transmitting/receiving

remote control signals” (page 18).

Connect an amplifier/receiver in the second zone and/or third zone and other components to this unit as follows.

Using multi-zone configuration

Only analog signal can be sent to the second and third zones. If you want to output sounds to Zone2/3, connect an

external component to the AV5-6 or AUDIO1-2 jacks (by analog connection). For example, if you want to output

sound from an HDMI DVD player to the second zone, you must connect the HDMI DVD player to this unit by both

HDMI and analog connections.

Connecting Zone2/3

Using external amplifiers

ZONE3

OUT

ZONE2

OUT

REMOTE

1AUDI

R.BA

FER

LTI

H INP

OUT

URR

UR.

PRE

VIDE

MONITOR OUT

SPEAKER

ENTE

URR

ENTER

NENT

IDE

LR LR

IR flasher or

Yamaha component

(DVD player, etc)

Remote control in

Remote control out

Analog audio output

Zone2 amplifier

(Yamaha component)

Zone3 amplifier

Analog audio output

IR receiver

in Zone2

70 En

Using multi-zone configuration

If you want to use one internal amplifier of this unit

Connect the Zone 2 speakers directly to the SP1 terminals and then set “Extra Speaker Assignment” to “Zone2”

(page 60)

If you want to use two internal amplifiers of this unit

Connect the Zone 2 and Zone 3 speakers directly to the SP1 and SP2 terminals and then set “Extra Speaker Assignment”

to “Zone2 + Zone3” (page 60).

•You can use the speakers connected to EXTRA SP (SP1/SP2) terminals as the front speaker system of another zone.

•When you use the internal amplifiers for the Zone2/3 speakers, you can adjust the volume level and set the initial volume and maximum volume of the

Zone2/3 speakers (page 64).

Using the internal amplifiers of this unit

Important safety notice

The EXTRA SP terminals of this unit should not be connected to a Passive Loudspeaker Selector Box or more than

one loudspeaker per channel.

Connection to a Passive Loudspeaker Selector Box or multiple speakers per channel could create an abnormally low

impedance load resulting in amplifier damage. See this owner’s manual for correct usage.

Compliance with minimum speaker impedance information for all channels must be maintained at all times. This

information is found on the back panel of your unit.

MAIN

ZONE 2

ZONE 3

Infrared signal

emitter

DVD player etc.

Amplifier

Remote control

Infrared signal

receiver

Amplifier

Second zone

(Zone 2)

Third zone

(Zone 3)

Main zone

This unit

From the ZONE2 OUT jacks

From the ZONE3 OUT jacks

To the REMOTE IN jackFrom the REMOTE OUT jack

Analog audio signals only

ZONE2/PRESENCE

SP1

ZONE3

SP2

Zone3 speakers

This unit

Zone2 speakers

71 En

Using multi-zone configuration

English

INTRODUCTION

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION APPENDIX

PREPARATION

BASIC

OPERATION

ADVANCED

OPERATION

You can select and control Zone2/3 by using the control

keys on the front panel or on the remote control. The

available operations are as follows:

•Selecting the input source.

•Tuning into the desired station (when “TUNER” is

selected as the input source)

•Tuning into the desired channel (when “XM” or

“SIRIUS” is selected as the input source) (U.S.A. model

only)

•Adjusting the volume of Zone2/3 (when Zone2/3

speakers are connected to the EXTRA SP terminals).

Before controlling Zone2/3 by using the control keys on

the front panel or on the remote control, follow the

procedure below to switch this unit to the Zone2/3

operation mode.

■To control Zone2/3 by using the front panel

control keys

Press DZONE CONTROLS repeatedly to select

the zone you want to control while the target

zone is turned on.

The zone indicator flashes on the front panel display for

approximately 10 seconds.

Note

•Complete each step while the zone indicator is flashing on the front panel

display. Otherwise, the Zone2 or Zone3 operation mode is automatically

canceled and this unit returns to the main zone operation mode.

■To control Zone2/3 by using the remote

control

Switch bZone selection switch to “ZONE2”

or “ZONE3” position.

■Turning on or set Zone2 to standby

Press AZONE2 ON/OFF (or pPOWER).

■Turning on or set Zone3 to standby

Press CZONE3 ON/OFF (or pPOWER).

■Operating Zone2/3

Rotate the TINPUT selector (or press dInput

selection key) to select the desired input

source.

If you press dUSB/NET on the remote control, press

xSub-input selection key to select a sub-input

source.

•Select “AV5”, “AV6”, “AUDIO1”, “AUDIO2” or

“PHONO” to listen to the input source in the selected

zone.

•Select “DOCK” to use the iPod features (page 44) or

Bluetooth features (page 46) in the selected zone.

•Select “TUNER” to use the FM/AM radio features

(page 31) in the selected zone.

•Select “SIRIUS” to use the SIRIUS Satellite Radio

features (page 39) in the selected zone.

•Select “XM” to use the XM Satellite Radio features

(page 35) in the selected zone.

•Select “USB” to use the USB features (page 47) in the

selected zone.

•Select “NET RADIO” to use the Internet Radio features

(page 50) in the selected zone.

•Select “PC” to use the PC features (page 48) in the

selected zone.

•Select “Rhapsody” to use the Rhapsody® features

(page 51) in the selected zone.

Note

•The sub-input source (USB, NET RADIO, PC and Rhapsody) for “USB/

NET” is shared among all zones (main, Zone2 and Zone3). You cannot

select different sub-input source for each zone.

Controlling Zone2/3

Switching to the Zone2/3 operation mode

ZONE

Flashes

ZONE

Flashes

Operations in the Zone2/3 operation mode

72 En

You can control external components for a selected input source with the remote control. The keys available for

controlling external components are as follows:

cSOURCE POWER

Turns on and off an external component.

jCursor, ENTER, RETURN

Operates the menus of external components.

kExternal component operation keys

Function as a recording or playback key of an external

component, or a menu display key.

lNumeric keys

Function as numeric keys of an external component.

mTV control keys

uDISPLAY

Switches between the screens of external components.

•You can use mTV control keys to control your TV regardless of a

selected input source if a remote control code for your TV is assigned to

dAV1, dAV4 or dPHONO (in the order of descending priorities).

•You need to set the remote control code first to control external

components.

•The remote control keys for controlling external components are

available only when the external components have corresponding control

keys.

The following remote control codes are assigned to input

sources as factory default settings.

■Default remote control code settings

“—” indicates no assignment

•An external component controlled by the remote control is automatically

selected according to selection of the scenes (page 24).

You can control other components by setting the

appropriate remote control codes. For a complete list of

available remote control codes, refer to “List of remote

control codes” at the end of this manual.

You should perform each step within 1 minute after the

previous step.

1Press oCODE SET on the remote control

using a pointed object such as the tip of a

ballpoint pen.

nTRANSMIT blinks twice.

2Press the desired dInput selection key.

To use mTV control keys to control your TV,

assign a remote control code for your TV to dAV1,

dAV4 or dPHONO.

3Press lNumeric keys to enter a remote

control code.

Once the remote control code is registered,

nTRANSMIT blinks twice. If it fails,

nTRANSMIT blinks six times. Repeat from

step 1.

You can reset all remote control codes to the factory

default settings.

1Press oCODE SET on the remote control

using a pointed object such as a tip of a

ballpoint pen.

nTRANSMIT blinks twice.

2Press iON SCREEN.

3Press lNumeric keys to enter “9981”.

Once the initialization is complete, nTRANSMIT

blinks twice. If it fails, nTRANSMIT blinks six

times. Repeat from step 1.

Controlling other components with the remote control

INPUT Switches visual inputs of TV

MUTE Mutes audio of TV

TV VOL +/– Controls the volume of TV

TV CH +/– Switches channels of TV

POWER Turns on and off TV

Input source Category Manufacturer Default

code

[HDMI 1] Blu-ray Disc Yamaha 2018

[HDMI 2] — — —

[HDMI 3] — — —

[HDMI 4] — — —

[AV 1] ———

[AV 2] ———

[AV 3] CD Yamaha 5013

[AV 4] ———

[AV 5] ———

[AV 6] ———

[AUDIO 1] — — —

[AUDIO 2] — — —

[V-AUX] — — —

[PHONO] — — —

[MULTI]———

[DOCK] DOCK Yamaha 5011 (fixed)

[TUNER] Tuner Yamaha 5007 (fixed)

[SIRIUS] Tuner Yamaha 5017 (fixed)

[XM] Tuner Yamaha 5009 (fixed)

[USB/NET] — Yamaha — (fixed)

Setting remote control codes

Resetting all remote control codes

Input source Category Manufacturer Default

code

73 En

English

INTRODUCTION

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION APPENDIX

PREPARATION

BASIC

OPERATION

ADVANCED

OPERATION

In the advanced setup menu, you can set basic operations

of this unit, such as on and off of a bi-amp connection, or

initialize user settings.

1Set this unit to standby.

2While holding down QSTRAIGHT on the

front panel, press LMAIN ZONE ON/OFF.

Keep holding down QSTRAIGHT until

“ADVANCED SETUP” appears on the front panel

display.

3Rotate the PPROGRAM selector to select

the parameter you want to change.

The default setting are marked with “*”.

•Set values are placed in XXX of the following parameters on an

actual display screen.

SP IMP. -XXX

Selects output impedance of this unit according to

connected speakers. When you connect 4-ohm

speakers to the FRONT speaker terminals, set “SP

IMP.” to “6ΩMIN.”.

RS232C STBY -X

Selects whether or not to transmit data via the RS-

232C terminal when this unit is in the standby mode.

REMOTE ID -XXX

Sets a remote control ID. When using multiple

Yamaha AV receivers, you can operate them with a

single remote control by setting the receiver IDs to

the same setting.

SR PIN -XXX

Resets Parental lock cord when using SIRIUS

Satellite tuner.

BI AMP - XXX

Switches on and off of bi-amp connection of main

speakers. For bi-amp connection, see page 12.

SCENE IR -XXX

Selects whether or not to transmit the control signals

to an external component connected to the REMOTE

OUT jack on this unit when BD/DVD or CD SCENE

function is selected.

MON.CHK - XXXX

Adds upscaling limitation on output signals to a video

monitor connected to this unit via the HDMI OUT

jack.

INIT-XXXXXXXXX

Initializes various settings stored in this unit. You can

select an initialization method from the following.

DSP PARAM: All parameters of sound field

programs

VIDEO Video conversion settings (resolution/

aspect) in the Setup menu and the GUI

display position

NETWORK Network settings in the Setup menu

ALL All

CANCEL Cancellation of initialization

USB FirmUpdate

NET FirmUpdate

Updates the firmware of this unit. For details on how

to update the firmware, refer to information supplied

with updates.

Notes

•Do not use this feature unless you need to update the firmware.

•Be sure to read information supplied with updates before updating

the firmware.

VERXXX.XXX.XXX

Displays the firmware of this unit.

4Press OSTRAIGHT repeatedly to change

the selected parameter setting.

To change other settings, repeat steps 3 and 4.

5Press KMAIN ZONE ON/OFF to set this

unit to standby.

The settings you made are reflected next time you

turn on this unit.

Advanced setup

Choices: 6ΩMIN, 8ΩMIN*

Choices: Y (Yes)*, N (No)

Choices: ID1*, ID2

Choices: RESET, CANCEL*

Choices: ON, OFF*

Choices: ON*, OFF

ADVANCEDSETUP

Choices: YES*, SKIP

Choices: DSP PARAM, VIDEO, NETWORK, ALL,

CANCEL*

74 En

Advanced setup

Two IDs are provided for the remote control of this unit. If

another Yamaha amplifier is in the same room, setting a

different remote control ID to this unit prevents unwanted

operation of the other amplifier.

“ID1” is set for both the main unit and remote control by

default. If you have changed the remote control ID, make

sure that you select the same ID for the main unit in the

the advanced setup menu.

•For details on how to set the remote control ID of the simplified remote

control, see page 8.

1Press oCODE SET on the remote control

using a pointed object such as the tip of a

ballpoint pen.

nTRANSMIT blinks twice.

2Press iON SCREEN.

3Enter the desired remote control ID code.

To switch to ID1, press lNumeric keys to enter

“5019”.

To switch to ID2, press lNumeric keys to enter

“5020”.

Once the remote control code is registered,

nTRANSMIT blinks twice.

If it fails, nTRANSMIT blinks six times. Repeat

from step 1.

•If you initialize the settings of this unit, “REMOTE ID” (remote control

code of this unit) is set to “ID1”.

Setting a remote control ID

75 En

English

INTRODUCTION APPENDIX

PREPARATION

BASIC

OPERATION

ADVANCED

OPERATION

APPENDIX

Refer to the table below when this unit does not function properly. If the problem you are experiencing is not listed below

or if the instruction below does not help, turn off this unit, disconnect the power cable, and contact the nearest authorized

Yamaha dealer or service center.

Troubleshooting

General

Problem Cause Remedy See

page

This unit does not

operate properly.

The internal microcomputer is frozen due

to an external electric shock (such as

lightning or excessive static electricity) or

by a drop in power supply voltage.

Disconnect the power cable from the AC wall outlet,

wait about 30 seconds and then plug it in again.

—

This unit suddenly

enters the standby

mode

The internal temperature is too high and

the overheat protection circuitry has been

activated.

Wait about 1 hour for this unit to cool down and then

turn it back on.

—

The protection circuitry has been activated

because of a short circuit, etc.

Check that the speaker impedance setting is correct. 73

Check that the speaker wires are not touching each

other and then turn this unit back on.

—

The sleep timer has turned off this unit. Turn on this unit and play the source again. —

This unit fails to turn

on or enters the

standby mode soon

after the power is

turned on.

The power cable is not connected or the

plug is not completely inserted.

Connect the power cable properly to an AC wall

outlet.

The speaker impedance setting is

incorrect.

Set the speaker impedance to match your speakers. 73

(When this unit is turned back on and

“CHECK SP WIRES!” is displayed.) The

protection circuitry has been activated

because this unit was turned on while a

speaker cable was shorted.

Make sure that all speaker cables between this unit

and speakers are connected properly.

This unit cannot be

turned off.

The internal microcomputer is frozen due

to an external electric shock (such as

lightning or excessive static electricity) or

by a drop in power supply voltage.

Disconnect the power cable from the AC wall outlet,

wait about 30 seconds and then plug it in again.

—

76 En

Troubleshooting

No picture. An appropriate video input is not selected

on the video monitor.

Select an appropriate video input on the video

monitor.

—

An appropriate HDMI OUT jack is not

selected.

Select the HDMI OUT jack which your video

monitor is connected.

The external video component is

connected to one of the HDMI 1-4 jacks

or HDMI IN (VIDEO AUX) jack while

your video monitor is connected to the

MONITOR OUT (COMPONENT

VIDEO or VIDEO) jacks.

Connect the external video component to the video

input jacks other than the HDMI 1-4 jacks or connect

the video monitor to one of the HDMI OUT jacks or

HDMI IN (VIDEO AUX) jack.

14, 16

This unit outputs the video signals not

supported by the video monitor connected

to one of the HDMI OUT jacks.

Displays the advanced setup menu and select

“VIDEO” in “INIT” to reset the video parameters.

Displays the advanced setup menu and set

“MON.CHK” to “YES”.

Video signals are input from a game

console while your video monitor is

connected to one of the HDMI OUT jacks.

Connect the video monitor to the MONITOR OUT

(COMPONENT VIDEO) jacks.

Non-standard video signals are input. Connect the video monitor to the MONITOR OUT

(COMPONENT VIDEO or VIDEO) jacks.

The picture is

disturbed.

The video software is copy-protected.

No sound. Incorrect input or output cable

connections.

Connect the cables properly. If the problem persists,

the cables may be defective.

No appropriate input source has been

selected.

Rotate the TINPUT selector (or press dInput

selection key) to select the desired input source.

Speaker connections are not secure. Secure the connections. 11

The volume is turned down or muted. Turn up the volume. 24

Signals this unit cannot reproduce are

being input from a source component,

such as a CD-ROM.

Display “Signal Info” in the Option menu and check

the input signal format.

If “No Signal” is displayed, check if the playback

component is properly connected to this unit (or a

proper input source is selected).

If “___” is displayed, the input signal in that format

cannot be reproduced by this unit.

—

The HDMI components connected to this

unit do not support the HDCP copy

protection standards.

Connect HDMI components that support the HDCP

copy protection standards.

“Audio Output” in “HDMI” is set to

“TV”.

Set “Audio Output” (Function Setup → HDMI →

Audio Output) to the other setting.

A proper audio decoder is not selected. Display the Option menu and set “Decoder Mode” to

“Auto”.

Only the center

speaker outputs

substantial sound.

When a monaural source sound field

program is applied, sound of all channels

are output from the center speaker for

some surround decoders.

Try another sound field program. 27

The playback component or speakers are

not connected properly.

Connect the cables properly. If the problem persists,

the cables may be defective.

12, 16

Problem Cause Remedy See

page

77 En

Troubleshooting

English

INTRODUCTION APPENDIX

PREPARATION

BASIC

OPERATION

ADVANCED

OPERATION

No sound is output

from a specific

speaker.

Output from that speaker is disabled. Check the Speaker indicators on the front panel

display. If the corresponding indicator is turned off,

try the following.

1) Change the input source to another one.

2) With the selected sound field program, sound is not

output from that speaker. Select another sound field

program.

3) “None” may have been selected for that speaker on

this unit. Display “Speaker Setup” in the “Setup”

menu and enables output of that speaker.

6, 24, 27,

The volume of that speaker is set to

minimum in “Speaker Setup” in the

“Setup” menu.

Display “Speaker Setup” in the “Setup” menu and

adjust the volume (Manual Setup → Speaker Level).

This unit is in the straight decode mode. Press QSTRAIGHT (or rSTRAIGHT) to turn

off the straight decode mode.

Sound may not be output from certain

channels depending on input sources or

sound field programs.

Try another sound field program. 27

The speaker is malfunction. Check the speaker indicators on the front panel

display. If the corresponding indicator lights up,

connect another speaker and check if sound is output.

If sound is not output, this unit may be malfunction.

—

No sound is heard

from the subwoofer.

“LFE / Bass Out” is set to “Front” and a

Dolby Digital, DTS or AAC signals is

being played.

Set “LFE / Bass Out” to “Subwoofer” or “Both”. 60

“LFE / Bass Out” is set to “Subwoofer” or

“Front” and a 2-channel source is being

played.

Set “LFE / Bass Out” to “Both”. 60

The source does not contain low

frequency signals.

No sound is heard

from the surround

back speakers.

“Extended Surround” in the Option menu

is set to “Off”, or an input signal does not

contain a surround back flag with

“Extended Surround” set to “Auto”.

Set “Extended Surround” other than “Off” or “Auto”. 54

The audio input

sources cannot be

played in the desired

digital audio signal

format.

The connected component is not set to

output the desired digital audio signals.

Set the playback component properly referring to its

operating instructions.

—

Multi-channel

playback is not

available.

The connected component is set to output

2-ch or PCM signals.

Set the playback component properly referring to its

operating instructions.

—

“Audio Output” is set to “Amplifier +

TV”.

Set “Audio Output” to “Amplifier”. 62

Problem Cause Remedy See

page

78 En

Troubleshooting

Noise/hum noise is

heard.

Incorrect cable connection. Connect the audio cables properly. If the problem

persists, the cables may be defective.

—

A DTS-CD is being played back. 1) When only noise is output

If a DTS bitstream signal is not properly input to this

unit, only noise is output. Connect the playback

component to this unit by digital connection and play

back the DTS-CD. If the condition is not improved,

the problem may results from the playback

component. Consult the manufacturer of the playback

component.

2) When noise is output during playback or skip

operation

Before playing back the DTS-CD, display the Option

menu after selecting the input source and set

“Decoder Mode” to “DTS”.

16, 54

The volume level

cannot be increased,

or the sound is

distorted.

The component connected to the AUDIO

1/2 jacks of this unit is turned off.

Turn on the power of the component. 72

“Memory Guard!” is

displayed and the

setting cannot be

changed.

“Memory Guard” in “Set Menu” is set to

“On”.

Set “Memory Guard” to “Off”. 68

There is noise

interference from

digital or radio

frequency equipment.

This unit is too close to other digital or

radio frequency equipment.

Move this unit further away from such equipment. —

HDMI™

Problem Cause Remedy See

page

No picture or sound. The number of the connected HDMI

components is over the limit.

Disconnect some of the HDMI components. —

The connected HDMI component does not

support high-bandwidth digital copyright

protection (HDCP).

Connect an HDMI component that supports HDCP. 92

Problem Cause Remedy See

page

79 En

Troubleshooting

English

INTRODUCTION APPENDIX

PREPARATION

BASIC

OPERATION

ADVANCED

OPERATION

Tuner (FM/AM)

Problem Cause Remedy See

page

FM stereo reception is

noisy.

You are too far from the station

transmitter or the input from the

antenna is weak.

Check the antenna connections. 20

Replace the outdoor antenna with a more

sensitive multi-element antenna.

—

Switch to monaural mode. 55

There is distortion, and

clear reception cannot

be obtained even with a

good FM antenna.

There is multi-path interference. Adjust the antenna height or orientation, or

place it in a different location.

—

The desired station

cannot be tuned into

with the automatic

tuning method.

You are in an area far from a station or

an input from the antenna is weak.

Replace an outdoor antenna with more

sensitive multi element antenna.

—

Tune in manually or by direct frequency

tuning.

The desired station

cannot be tuned into

with the automatic

tuning method.

The signal is weak or the antenna

connections are loose.

Adjust the AM loop antenna orientation. 20

Use the manual tuning method. 31

There are continuous

crackling and hissing

noises.

Supplied AM loop antenna is not

connected.

Connect the AM loop antenna correctly even

if you use an outdoor antenna.

The noises may be caused by lightning,

fluorescent lamps, motors, thermostats

and other electrical equipment.

It is difficult to completely eliminate noise,

but it can be reduced by installing and

properly grounding an outdoor AM antenna.

There are buzzing and

whining noises.

A TV set is being used nearby. Move this unit away from the TV set. —

HD Radio™ Reception (U.S.A. model only)

Problem Cause Remedy See

page

This unit cannot

receive the HD Radio

signals of the

selected radio station.

The radio station provides analog FM/AM

radio service only.

Select other radio stations that provides the HD Radio

service.

The signal is too weak. Adjust the antenna position. —

Use a high-quality FM/AM antenna. —

“Audio Mode” in the Option menu is set

to “Mono”.

Set “Audio Mode” to “Auto”. 55

This unit cannot

select other audio

programs than the

main program.

The radio station provides one audio

program only.

HD Radio information

does not appear.

The radio station does not provide the

information.

80 En

Troubleshooting

If an operation takes longer than usual or an error occurs, one of the following messages may appear on the GUI screen.

In this case, read the cause and follow the corresponding remedies.

iTunes Tagging (U.S.A. model only)

Problem Cause Remedy See

page

Tag data cannot be

transferred to your

iPod when it is station

in the Yamaha iPod

universal dock (YDS-

10).

“YDS-10” does not support tag file

transfer.

Use “YDS-11” to transfer tag data from this unit to

your iPod.

—

Status message Cause Remedy See

page

Insufficient Data Tag data is not saved because of invalid

data.

The selected HR Radio program (or song being

played) does not support the iTunes Tagging feature.

—

Tag Already Stored Tag data for the same content has been

already saved.

Tag Storage full Tag data cannot be stored because the

internal memory of this unit is full.

Station your iPod in the Yamaha iPod universal dock

(YDS-11) connected to the DOCK terminal of this

unit.

—

iPod full

Tags cannot be stored

Tag data cannot be stored on your iPod

because the HDD space of your iPod is

full.

Delete unnecessary data from your iPod to make

room and try again.

—

Transferring Failed Tag data cannot be transferred to your

iPod.

Check if the iPod is stationed in the Yamaha iPod

universal dock (YDS-11) properly.

—

Storing Tag Tag data is being stored in the internal

memory of this unit.

Transferring Tag data is being transferred to your iPod.

Tag(s)Sent Tag data has been transferred to your

iPod.

XM Satellite Radio (U.S.A. model only)

Status message Cause Remedy See

page

CHECK XM TUNER The XM Mini-Tuner is not installed in the

XM Mini-Tuner Home Dock or the XM

Mini-Tuner Home Dock is not connected

to this unit.

Confirm the XM Mini-Tuner is fully seated in the

dock and check the XM Mini-Tuner Home Dock

cable is connected to this unit.

CHECK ANTENNA The XM antenna is not connected to the

XM Mini-Tuner Home Dock or the XM

antenna cable has become damaged.

Check that the XM antenna is securely connected to

the XM Mini-Tuner Home Dock and check the

antenna cable for damage. Replace the XM antenna if

the cable is damaged.

LOADING XM The XM Mini-Tuner is acquiring audio or

program information from the XM

satellite signal. This message can also

occur in weak XM signal conditions. Note

that this unit may not respond to some

operations while this message is

displayed.

This message should disappear in a few seconds in

good signal conditions. If you see this message often,

reposition the XM antenna to get better signal

reception. Use the “Antenna” information on the front

panel display or XM information on the GUI screen

to check the antenna reception level.

81 En

Troubleshooting

English

INTRODUCTION APPENDIX

PREPARATION

BASIC

OPERATION

ADVANCED

OPERATION

If an operation takes longer than usual or an error occurs, one of the following messages may appear on the GUI screen.

In this case, read the cause and follow the corresponding remedies.

NO SIGNAL The XM Mini-Tuner is not receiving the

XM satellite signal. Something may be

blocking the XM antenna’s view of the

satellites or the antenna is not properly

aimed.

Check for antenna obstructions and reposition the

XM antenna to get better signal reception. Use the

“Antenna” information on the front panel display or

XM information on the GUI screen to check the

antenna reception level. See instructions supplied

with the XM Mini-Tuner and Dock for antenna

installation information.

CHANNEL OFF AIR The XM channel you selected is not

currently broadcasting.

Check back at a later time; in the meantime, select

another channel.

—

CHANNEL NOT

AUTHORIZED

You may be attempting to tune to an XM

channel that is blocked or that you cannot

receive with your XM subscription

package.

Consult the latest channel guide at

http://www.xmradio.com/ for the current list of

channels. For information on receiving this channel,

visit http://www.xmradio.com/ or contact XM

Satellite Radio at 1-800-967-2346.

—

CHANNEL NOT

AVAILABLE

The selected channel is not available. The

channel may have been reassigned to a

different channel number. This message

may occur initially with a new XM Mini-

Tuner or an XM Mini-Tuner that has not

received XM’s signal for an extended

period.

Consult the latest channel guide at

http://www.xmradio.com/ for the current list of

channels. For cases of a new XM Mini-Tuner or an

XM Mini-Tuner that has not received XM’s signal for

an extended period, allow the XM Mini-Tuner to

receive the XM satellite signal for at least 5 minutes

and then try to select the channel again.

—

- - - - No artist name or song title is available for

this selection.

No action required. —

SIRIUS Satellite Radio (U.S.A. model only)

Status message Cause Remedy See

page

ANTENNA ERROR The antenna is not connected to the

SiriusConnect tuner properly.

Check the connection of the antenna and

SiriusConnect tuner.

SIRIUS LOADING This unit is communicating with the

SiriusConnect tuner.

The message disappears normally within several tens

of seconds.

—

CHECK SIRIUS

TUNER

The SiriusConnect tuner is not connected

to the SIRIUS jack of this unit correctly.

Check the connection of the SiriusConnect tuner and

this unit.

The SiriusConnect tuner is not connected

to the AC wall outlet.

Connect the power cable of the SiriusConnect tuner to

the AC wall outlet.

NOT SUPPORTED This unit does not support the connected

SIRIUS Satellite Radio tuner.

Connect the SiriusConnect tuner that this unit

supports,

ACQUIRING SIGNAL The signal is too weak. Adjust the orientation of the antenna of the

SiriusConnect tuner. Use the “Antenna” information

on the front panel display or SIRIUS information on

the GUI screen to check the antenna reception level.

UPDATING The SiriusConnect tuner is updating the

channel list.

Wait until the updating is complete. —

The period of the subscription is end. Contact SIRIUS Satellite Radio to renew the

subscription.

F/W UPDATING The SiriusConnect tuner is updating the

firmware.

Wait until the updating is complete. —

Status message Cause Remedy See

page

82 En

Troubleshooting

CALL 888-539-SIRIUS

TO SUBSCRIBE

The selected channel is not subscribed. Contact SIRIUS Satellite Radio to subscribe the

selected channel.

URL: https://activate.siriusradio.com/

Phone: 1-888-539-SIRIUS (1-888-539-7474)

Select another channel. 39

SUBSCRIPTION

UPDATED

The subscription information is updated.

INVALID CHANNEL The selected channel is currently out of

service.

Select another channel. 39

Not Available The operation you made is not available.

Remote control

Problem Cause Remedy See

page

The remote control

does not work or

function properly.

Wrong distance or angle. The remote control will function within a maximum

range of 6 m (20 ft) and no more than 30 degrees

offaxis from the front panel.

Direct sunlight or lighting (from an

inverter type of fluorescent lamp, strobe

light, etc.) is striking the remote control

sensor of this unit.

Adjust the lighting angle or reposition this unit. —

The batteries are weak. Replace all batteries. 6, 8

The remote control ID of the remote

control and this unit do not match.

Match the remote control ID of this unit and the

remote control.

The remote control code is not correctly

set.

Set the remote control code correctly using “List of

remote control codes” at the end of this manual.

Try setting another code of the same manufacturer

using “List of remote control codes” at the end of this

manual.

If this unit does not work when you press jCursor,

do the following.

When the key does not work during DVD disc menu

operation: press the dInput selection keys on

the remote control again.

When the key does not work during Option menu or

Setup menu operation: press the key applicable for

the current menu operation again.

—

Even if the remote control code is

correctly set, there are some models that

do not respond to the remote control.

Status message Cause Remedy See

page

83 En

Troubleshooting

English

INTRODUCTION APPENDIX

PREPARATION

BASIC

OPERATION

ADVANCED

OPERATION

Note

•In case of a transmission error without a status message appearing on the front panel display and GUI screen, check the connection of your iPod

(page 18).

iPod™

Status message Cause Remedy See

page

Loading... This unit is in the middle of recognizing

the connection with your iPod.

This unit is in the middle of acquiring

song lists from your iPod.

Connect error There is a problem with the signal path

from your iPod to this unit.

Turn off this unit and reconnect the Yamaha iPod

universal dock to the DOCK terminal of this unit.

Remove your iPod in the Yamaha iPod universal dock

and then place it back in the dock.

Unknown iPod The iPod being used is not supported by

this unit.

Use an iPod supported by this unit. —

iPod Connected Your iPod is properly placed in the

Yamaha iPod universal dock.

Disconnected Your iPod is removed from the Yamaha

iPod universal dock.

Unable to play This unit cannot play back the songs

currently stored on your iPod.

Check that the songs currently stored on your iPod

are playable.

—

Bluetooth™

Status message Cause Remedy See

page

Searching... The Bluetooth wireless audio receiver and

the Bluetooth component are in the

middle of the pairing.

The Bluetooth wireless audio receiver and

the Bluetooth component are in the

middle of establishing the connection.

Completed The pairing is completed.

Canceled The pairing is canceled.

BT Connected The connection between the Yamaha

Bluetooth wireless audio receiver and the

Bluetooth component is established.

Disconnected The Bluetooth component is disconnected

from the Yamaha Bluetooth wireless

audio receiver.

Not Found No Bluetooth components are found

during a pairing process.

Pairing must be performed on the both this unit and

your Bluetooth component at the same time. Check

whether your Bluetooth component is set to the

paring mode and then try again.

No Bluetooth components are found

during a Bluetooth connection.

Check whether your Bluetooth component is turned

on and then try again.

Locate your Bluetooth component within 10 meters

(33 feet) of this unit and then try again.

84 En

Troubleshooting

USB and network

Problem Cause Remedy See

page

The music files and

folders in the USB

storage device cannot

be browsed.

The music files and folders are stored the

locations other than the FAT area.

Place the music files and folders in the FAT area. —

You are attempting to browse directory

hierarchies of over 8 levels or a directory

with more than 500 files.

Modify the data structure on your USB storage

device.

—

This unit cannot recognize some

characters used in the file name or folder

name.

Edit the file name or folder name using a PC and then

try again.

—

The USB storage

device cannot be

recognized.

The USB storage device is not compatible

with mass storage class (except USB

HDDs).

Use a USB storage device that is compatible with

mass storage class (except USB HDDs).

—

This unit does not recognize the USB

storage device properly.

Turn this unit off and then turn on again. 20

The PC server/

Internet Radio/

Rhapsody® does not

function properly.

The network cable is not connected

properly.

Connect the network cable properly. 19

The IP address is not set properly. Set the DHCP server function of the router to ON.

Alternately, perform manual configuration according

to the current operating environment.

The music on the PC

server cannot be

played back.

The PC does not have Windows Media

Player 11 installed on it.

Install Windows Media Player 11 on the PC. —

The music is recorded in a format that

cannot be played on this unit. This unit

cannot play music formats other than

WAV (PCM format only), MP3, WMA,

MPEG-4 AAC or FLAC. Also note some

music files cannot be played regardless of

the file formats.

Play music recorded in a format that this unit is

compatible with.

—

Internet Radio

stations cannot be

played.

The firewall of the network device is

activated. Internet Radio stations can only

be played when the signal pass through

the port designated by the individual radio

stations. The port number varies from

station to station.

Check the firewall setting of the network device. —

Connection to the Internet is not available. Check the configuration of the network device and

contact your Internet service provider.

—

Skip forward

operation becomes

not available during

playback of a

Rhapsody® channel.

Skip forward works up to 30 times every 3

hours during playback of a Rhapsody®

channel.

—

Status message Cause Remedy See

page

USB Connected Your USB storage device is connected. —

USB Disconnected Your USB storage device has been

disconnected from the USB port of this

unit.

Check the connection between this unit and your

USB storage device.

—

85 En

Troubleshooting

English

INTRODUCTION APPENDIX

PREPARATION

BASIC

OPERATION

ADVANCED

OPERATION

Access Error

(ACCESS ERROR)

This unit cannot access your USB storage

device.

Try another USB storage device. —

There is a problem with the signal path

from your USB storage device to this unit.

Turn off this unit and reconnect your USB storage

device to the USB port of this unit.

19, 20

Try resetting your USB storage device. —

This unit cannot connect to the data server

due to network error, etc.

Check the network settings and contact your Internet

service provider.

Access Denied The PC you are attempting to connect has

denied connection.

Configure the sharing setting of Windows Media

Player 11 and select this unit as a device to which

music contents are shared.

Unable to play This unit cannot play back the songs

currently stored on your PC.

Make sure Windows Media Player 11 is installed on

your PC.

—

Play music recorded in a format that this unit is

compatible with (WAV (PCM format only), MP3,

WMA, MPEG-4 AAC or FLAC).

—

License unavailable You are attempting to play back expired

digital rights management (DRM)

encrypted content.

Select a file that is not protected by DRM —

Windows Media Player 11 does not

acquire the digital rights management

(DRM) license for the file.

Acquire the license to play back the file on Windows

Media Player 11.

—

Rhapsody® account.

account failed because of an incorrect user

name.

Retry with the correct user name. 51

WRONG PASSWORD Your attempt to log in to the Rhapsody®

account failed because of an incorrect

password.

Retry with the correct password. 51

x days left Your trial account will be expired in x

days.

continuously.

For more information,

http://www.rhapsody.com/yamaha/go

Your account has

expired

Your account has already expired. Sign up for Rhapsody® to use the service

continuously.

For more information,

http://www.rhapsody.com/yamaha/go

No Contents No Rhapsody® items match your search

keyword.

Retry with another keyword. 51

No Rhapsody® items exist in “My

Library”.

Add your favorite Rhapsody® items to “My Library”. 52

Skip Limit Reached Skip forward works up to 30 times every 3

hours during playback of a Rhapsody®

channel.

It will be resumed in 3 hours or after once you stop

the playback.

Status message Cause Remedy See

page

86 En

Troubleshooting

Notes

•If the an error or warning message appears, resolve the problem and then run “Auto Setup” again.

•Warning message “W-2” or “W-3” indicates that the adjusted settings may not be optimal.

•Depending on the speakers, warning message “W-1” may appears even if the speaker connections are correct.

•If error message “E-10” occurs repeatedly, contact a qualified Yamaha service center.

Auto Setup (YPAO)

Before Auto Setup

Error message Cause Remedy See

page

Connect MIC! Optimizer microphone is not connected. Connect the supplied optimizer microphone to the

OPTIMIZER MIC jack on the front panel.

Unplug HP! Headphones are connected. Unplug the headphones. —

Memory Guard! The parameters of this unit are protected. Set “Memory Guard” to “Off”. 68

During Auto Setup

Error message Cause Remedy See

page

E-1:NO FRONT SP Front L/R channel signals are not

detected.

Check the front L/R speaker connections. 11

E-2:NO SUR. SP Only a signal from one of the surround

channels are detected.

Check the surround L/R speaker connections. 11

E-3:NO PRNS SP Only signals from one of the presence L/

R channels are detected.

Check the presence L/R speaker connections. 11

E-4:SBR->SBL Only right surround back channel signal

is detected.

If you connect only one surround back speaker,

connect it to the left SUR.BACK (SINGLE) jack.

E-5:NOISY Measurement cannot be performed

accurately due to loud ambient noise.

Try running “Auto Setup” in a quiet environment. —

Turn off noisy electric equipment like air

conditioners or move them away from the optimizer

microphone.

—

E-6:CHECK SUR. Surround back speakers are connected,

though surround L/R speakers are not.

When using surround back speakers, you need to

connect surround L/R speakers.

E-7:NO MIC The optimizer microphone was

unplugged during the “Auto Setup”

procedure.

Do not touch the optimizer microphone during “Auto

Setup”.

E-8:NO SIGNAL The optimizer microphone does not

detect test tones.

Check whether the microphone is properly placed. 21

Check whether the speakers are properly placed and

connected.

10, 11

The optimizer microphone or OPTIMIZER MIC

jack may be defective. Contact the nearest Yamaha

dealer or service center.

—

E-9:USER CANCEL “Auto Setup” was canceled due to an

inappropriate user operation.

Run “Auto Setup” again. 21

E-10:INTERNAL

ERROR

An internal error occurred. Run “Auto Setup” again. 21

87 En

Troubleshooting

English

INTRODUCTION APPENDIX

PREPARATION

BASIC

OPERATION

ADVANCED

OPERATION

After Auto Setup

Error message Cause Remedy See

page

W-1:OUT OF PHASE Speaker polarity is not correct. This

message may appear depending on the

speakers even when the speakers are

connected correctly.

Check the polarities (+, –) of the displayed speaker.

If they are correct, the speakers work properly even

when this message is displayed.

W-2:OVER 24m (80ft) The distance between the speaker and the

listening position is over 24 m (80 ft).

Bring the speaker within 24 m (80 ft.) area around

the listening position.

—

W-3:LEVEL ERROR The difference of volume level among

speakers is excessive.

Recheck the speaker positions and make sure all

speakers are placed in a similar environment.

—

Check the polarities (+, –) of the speakers. 12

We recommended that you use speakers with the

same or similar specifications.

—

Adjust the output volume of the subwoofer. —

W-4:CHECK PRNS Presence speakers were not detected

during measurement with “Extra Speaker

Assignment” set to “Presence”.

Check the presence speaker connections and perform

measurement again. If presence speakers are not

connected, set the “Extra Speaker Assignment” to

other than “Presence”.

11, 60

88 En

■Audio and video synchronization (lip sync)

Lip sync, an abbreviation for lip synchronization, is a technical term

that involves both a problem and a capability of maintaining audio and

video signals synchronized during post-production and transmission.

Whereas the audio and video latency requires complex end-user

adjustments, HDMI version 1.3 incorporates an automatic audio and

video syncing capability that allows devices to perform this

synchronization automatically and accurately without user interaction.

■Bi-amplification connection

A bi-amplification connection uses two amplifiers for a speaker.

One amplifier is connected to the woofer section of a loudspeaker

while the other is connected to the combined mid and tweeter section.

With this arrangement each amplifier operates over a restricted

frequency range. This restricted range presents each amplifier with a

much simpler job and each amplifier is less likely to influence the

sound in some way.

■Component video signal

With the component video signal system, the video signal is separated

into the Y signal for the luminance and the PB and PR signals for the

chrominance. Color can be reproduced more faithfully with this

system because each of these signals is independent. The component

signal is also called the “color difference signal” because the

luminance signal is subtracted from the color signal. A monitor with

component input jacks is required in order to output component

signals.

■Composite video signal

With the composite video signal system, the video signal is composed

of three basic elements of a video picture: color, brightness and

synchronization data. A composite video jack on a video component

transmits these three elements combined.

■Deep Color

Deep Color refers to the use of various color depths in displays, up

from the 24-bit depths in previous versions of the HDMI specification.

This extra bit depth allows HDTVs and other displays go from

millions of colors to billions of colors and eliminate on-screen color

banding for smooth tonal transitions and subtle gradations between

colors. The increased contrast ratio can represent many times more

shades of gray between black and white. Also Deep Color increases

the number of available colors within the boundaries defined by the

RGB or YCbCr color space.

■Dolby Digital

Dolby Digital is a digital surround sound system that gives you

completely independent multi-channel audio. With 3 front channels

(front L/R and center), and 2 surround stereo channels, Dolby Digital

provides 5 full-range audio channels. With an additional channel

especially for bass effects, called LFE (Low Frequency Effect), the

system has a total of 5.1-channels (LFE is counted as 0.1 channel). By

using 2-channel stereo for the surround speakers, more accurate

moving sound effects and surround sound environment are possible

than with Dolby Surround. The wide dynamic range from maximum

to minimum volume reproduced by the 5 full-range channels and the

precise sound orientation generated using digital sound processing

provide listeners with unprecedented excitement and realism.

With this unit, any sound environment from monaural up to a 5.1-

channel configuration can be freely selected for your enjoyment.

■Dolby Digital Surround EX

Dolby Digital EX creates 6 full-bandwidth output channels from 5.1-

channel sources.

For the best results, Dolby Digital EX should be used with movie

sound tracks recorded with Dolby Digital Surround EX. With this

additional channel, you can experience more dynamic and realistic

moving sound especially with scenes with “fly-over” and “fly-

around” effects.

■Dolby Digital Plus

Dolby Digital Plus is an advanced audio technology developed for

high-definition programming and media including HD broadcasts,

and Blu-ray Disc. Selected as an optional audio standard for Blu-ray

Disc, this technology delivers multichannel sound with discrete

channel output. Supporting bitrates up to 6.0 Mbps, Dolby Digital

Plus can carry up to 7.1 discreet audio channels simultaneously.

Supported by HDMI version 1.3 and designed for the optical disc

players and AV receivers/amplifiers of the future, Dolby Digital Plus

also remains fully compatible with the existing multichannel audio

systems that incorporate Dolby Digital.

■Dolby Pro Logic II

Dolby Pro Logic II is an improved technique used to decode vast

numbers of existing Dolby Surround sources. This new technology

enables a discrete 5-channel playback with 2 front left and right

channels, 1 center channel, and 2 surround left and right channels

instead of only 1 surround channel for conventional Pro Logic

technology. There are three modes available: “Music mode” for music

sources, “Movie mode” for movie sources and “Game mode” for

game sources.

■Dolby Pro Logic IIx

Dolby Pro Logic IIx is a new technology enabling discrete

multichannel playback from 2-channel or multi-channel sources.

There are three modes available: “Music mode” for music sources,

“Movie mode” for movie sources (for 2-channel sources only) and

“Game mode” for game sources.

■Dolby Surround

Dolby Surround is widely used with nearly all video tapes and laser

discs, and in many TV and cable broadcasts as well. Dolby Surround

uses a 4-channel analog recording system to reproduce realistic and

dynamic sound effects: 2 front left and right channels (stereo), a

center channel for dialog (monaural), and a surround channel for

special sound effects (monaural). The surround channel reproduces

sound within a narrow frequency range. The Dolby Pro Logic decoder

built into this unit employs a digital signal processing system that

automatically stabilizes the volume on each channel to enhance

moving sound effects and directionality.

■Dolby TrueHD

Dolby TrueHD is an advanced lossless audio technology developed

for high-definition disc-based media including Blu-ray Disc. Selected

as an optional audio standard for Blu-ray Disc, this technology

delivers sound that is bit-for-bit identical to the studio master, offering

a high-definition home theater experience.

Supporting bitrates up to 18.0 Mbps, Dolby TrueHD can carry up to 8

discrete channels of 24-bit/96 kHz audio simultaneously.

Dolby TrueHD also remains fully compatible with the existing

multichannel audio systems and retains the metadata capability of

Dolby Digital, allowing dialog normalization and dynamic range

control.

Glossary

89 En

Glossary

English

INTRODUCTION APPENDIX

PREPARATION

BASIC

OPERATION

ADVANCED

OPERATION

■DSD

Direct Stream Digital (DSD) technology stores audio signals on

digital storage media, such as Super Audio CDs. Using DSD, signals

are stored as single bit values at a high-frequency sampling rate of

2.8224 MHz, while noise shaping and oversampling are used to

reduce distortion, a common occurrence with very high quantization

of audio signals. Due to the high sampling rate, better audio quality

can be achieved than that offered by the PCM format used for normal

audio CDs. The frequency is equal to or higher than 100 kHz and the

dynamic range is 120 dB. This unit can transmit or receive DSD

signals input from the HDMI jack.

■DTS 96/24

DTS 96/24 offers an unprecedented level of audio quality for multi-

channel sound on DVD video, and is fully backward-compatible with

all DTS decoders. “96” refers to a 96 kHz sampling rate compared to

the typical 48 kHz sampling rate. “24” refers to 24-bit word length.

DTS 96/24 offers sound quality transparent to the original 96/24

master, and 96/24 5.1-channel sound with full-quality full-motion

video for music programs and motion picture soundtracks on DVD

video.

■DTS Digital Surround

DTS digital surround was developed to replace the analog soundtracks

of movies with a 5.1-channel digital sound track, and is now rapidly

gaining popularity in movie theaters around the world. DTS, Inc. has

developed a home theater system so that you can enjoy the depth of

sound and natural spatial representation of DTS digital surround in

your home. This system produces practically distortion-free 6-channel

sound (technically, front left and right, center, surround left and right,

and LFE 0.1 (subwoofer) channels for a total of 5.1 channels). This

unit incorporates a DTS-ES decoder that enables 6.1-channel

reproduction by adding the surround back channel to the existing 5.1-

channel format.

■DTS Express

This is an audio format for next-generation optical discs such as Blu-

ray discs. It uses optimized low bit rate signals for network streaming.

In the case of a Blu-ray disc, this format is used with secondary audio,

enabling you to enjoy the commentary of the movie producer via the

Internet while playing the main program.

■DTS-HD High Resolution Audio

DTS-HD High Resolution Audio is a high resolution audio

technology developed for high-definition disc-based media including

Blu-ray Disc. Selected as an optional audio standard for Blu-ray Disc,

this technology delivers sound that is virtually indistinguishable from

the original, offering a high-definition home theater experience.

Supporting bitrates up to 6.0 Mbps for Blu-ray Disc, DTS-HD High

Resolution Audio can carry up to 7.1 discrete channels of 24-bit/96

kHz audio simultaneously.

DTS-HD High Resolution Audio also remains fully compatible with

the existing multichannel audio systems that incorporate DTS Digital

Surround.

■DTS-HD Master Audio

DTS-HD Master Audio is an advanced lossless audio technology

developed for high-definition disc-based media including Blu-ray

Disc. Selected as an optional audio standard for Blu-ray Disc, this

technology delivers sound that is bit-for-bit identical to the studio

master, offering a high-definition home theater experience.

Supporting bitrates up to 24.5 Mbps for Blu-ray Disc, DTS-HD

Master Audio can carry up to 7.1 discrete channels of 24-bit/96 kHz

audio simultaneously. Supported by HDMI version 1.3 and designed

for the optical disc players and AV receivers/amplifiers of the future,

DTS-HD Master Audio also remains fully compatible with the

existing multichannel audio systems that incorporate DTS Digital

Surround.

■FLAC

This is a file format for lossless audio data compression. FLAC is

inferior to lossy compression formats in compression rate but provides

higher audio quality.

■HDMI

HDMI (High-Definition Multimedia Interface) is the first industry-

supported, uncompressed, all-digital audio/video interface. Providing

an interface between any source (such as a set-top box or AV receiver)

and an audio/video monitor (such as a digital television), HDMI

supports standard, enhanced or high-definition video as well as multi-

channel digital audio using a single cable. HDMI transmits all ATSC

HDTV standards and supports 8-channel digital audio, with

bandwidth to spare to accommodate future enhancements and

requirements.

When used in combination with HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital

Content Protection), HDMI provides a secure audio/video interface

that meets the security requirements of content providers and system

operators. For further information on HDMI, visit the HDMI website

at “http://www.hdmi.org/”.

■LFE 0.1 channel

This channel reproduces low-frequency signals. The frequency range

of this channel is from 20 Hz to 120 Hz. This channel is counted as

0.1 because it only enforces a low-frequency range compared to the

full-range reproduced by the other 5/6 channels in Dolby Digital or

DTS 5.1/6.1-channel systems.

■MP3

One of the audio compression methods used by MPEG. It employs the

irreversible compression method, which achieves a high compression

rate by thinning out the data of hardly audible part to the human ears.

It is said to be capable of compressing the data quantity by about 1/11

(128 kbps) while maintaining a similar audio quality to music CD.

■MPEG-4 AAC

An MPEG-4 audio standard. As it allows compression of data at a bit

rate lower than that of MPEG-2 AAC, it is used among others for

mobile telephones, portable audio players and other low-capacity

devices requiring high sound quality.

In addition to the above types of devices, MPEG-4 AAC is also used

to distribute contents on the Internet, and as such is supported by

computers, media servers and many other devices.

■Neural Surround

Neural Surround represents the latest advancement in surround

technology and has been adopted by XM Satellite Radio for digital

radio broadcast of surround recordings and live events in surround

sound. Neural Surround employs psychoacoustic frequency domain

processing which allows delivery of a more detailed sound stage with

superior channel separation and localization of audio elements.

System playback is scalable from 5.1 to 7.1 multi-channel surround

playback.

■Neo:6

Neo:6 decodes the conventional 2-channel sources for 6- channel

playback by the specific decoder. It enables playback with the full-

range channels with higher separation just like digital discrete signal

playback. There are two modes available: “Music mode” for music

sources and “Cinema mode” for movie sources.

■PCM (Linear PCM)

Linear PCM is a signal format under which an analog audio signal is

digitized, recorded and transmitted without using any compression.

This is used as a method of recording CDs and DVD audio. The PCM

system uses a technique for sampling the size of the analog signal per

very small unit of time. Standing for “Pulse Code Modulation”, the

analog signal is encoded as pulses and then modulated for recording.

90 En

Glossary

■Sampling frequency and number of

quantized bits

When digitizing an analog audio signal, the number of times the

signal is sampled per second is called the sampling frequency, while

the degree of fineness when converting the sound level into a numeric

value is called the number of quantized bits. The range of rates that

can be played back is determined based on the sampling rate, while

the dynamic range representing the sound level difference is

determined by the number of quantized bits. In principle, the higher

the sampling frequency, the wider the range of frequencies that can be

played back, and the higher the number of quantized bits, the more

finely the sound level can be reproduced.

■WAV

Windows standard audio file format, which defines the method of

recording the digital data obtained by converting audio signals. It does

not specify the compression (coding) method so a desired

compression method can be used with it. By default, it is compatible

with the PCM method (no compression) and some compression

methods including the ADPCM method.

■WMA

An audio compression method developed by Microsoft Corporation. It

employs the irreversible compression method, which achieves a high

compression rate by thinning out the data of hardly audible part to the

human ears. It is said to be capable of compressing the data quantity

by about 1/22 (64 kbps) while maintaining a similar audio quality to

music CD.

■“x.v.Color”

A color space standard supported by HDMI version 1.3. It is a more

extensive color space than sRGB, and allows the expression of colors

that could not be expressed before. While remaining compatible with

the color gamut of sRGB standards, “x.v.Color” expands the color

space and can thus produce more vivid, natural images. It is

particularly effective for still pictures and computer graphics.

91 En

English

INTRODUCTION APPENDIX

PREPARATION

BASIC

OPERATION

ADVANCED

OPERATION

■Elements of a sound field

What really creates the rich, full tones of a live instrument

are the multiple reflections from the walls of the room. In

addition to making the sound live, these reflections enable

us to tell where the player is situated as well as the size

and shape of the room in which we are sitting. There are

two distinct types of sound reflections that combine to

make up the sound field in addition to the direct sound

coming straight to our ears from the playerfs instrument.

Early reflections

Reflected sounds reach our ears extremely rapidly (50 ms

to 100 ms after the direct sound), after reflecting from one

surface only (for example, from a wall or the ceiling).

Early reflections actually add clarity to the direct sound.

Reverberations

These are caused by reflections from more than one

surface (for example, from the walls, and/or the ceiling) so

numerous that they merge together to form a continuous

sonic afterglow. They are nondirectional and lessen the

clarity of the direct sound.

■CINEMA DSP

Since the Dolby Surround and DTS systems were originally designed

for use in movie theaters, their effect is best felt in a theater having

many speakers designed for acoustic effects. Since home conditions,

such as room size, wall material, number of speakers, and so on, can

differ so widely, it is inevitable that there are differences in the sound

heard.

Based on a wealth of actually measured data, Yamaha CINEMA DSP

provides the audiovisual experience of a movie theater in the listening

room of your own home by using the Yamaha original sound field

technology combined with various digital audio systems.

■CINEMA DSP 3D

The actually measured sound field data contain the

information of the height of the sound images. CINEMA

DSP 3D feature achieves the reproduction of the accurate

height of the sound images so that it creates the accurate

and intensive stereoscopic sound fields in a listening

room.

■SILENT CINEMA

Yamaha has developed a natural, realistic sound effect DSP algorithm

for headphones. Parameters for headphones have been set for each

sound field so that accurate representations of all the sound field

programs can be enjoyed on headphones.

■Virtual CINEMA DSP

Yamaha has developed a Virtual CINEMA DSP algorithm that allows

you to enjoy DSP sound field surround effects even without any

surround speakers by using virtual surround speakers. It is even

possible to enjoy Virtual CINEMA DSP using a minimal two-speaker

system that does not include a center speaker.

■Compressed Music Enhancer

The Compressed Music Enhancer feature of this unit enhances your

listening experience by regenerating the missing harmonics in a

compression artifact. As a result, flattened complexity due to the loss

of high-frequency fidelity as well as lack of bass due to the loss of

low-frequency bass is compensated, providing improved performance

of the overall sound system.

Sound field program information

Direct sound, early reflections and subsequent

reverberations taken together help us to determine the

subjective size and shape of the room, and it is this

information that the digital sound field processor

reproduces in order to create sound fields.

If you could create the appropriate early reflections and

subsequent reverberations in your listening room, you

would be able to create your own listening

environment.

The acoustics in your room could be changed to those

of a concert hall, a dance floor, or a room with virtually

any size at all. This ability to create sound fields at will

is exactly what Yamaha has done with the digital sound

field processor.

92 En

■HDMI signal compatibility

Audio signals

•If the input source component can decode the bitstream audio signals of audio commentaries, you can play back the audio sources with the audio

commentaries mixed down by using the following connections:

–multi-channel analog audio input (page 18)

–digital input (OPTICAL or COAXIAL)

•Refer to the supplied instruction manuals of the input source component, and set the component appropriately.

Notes

•When CPPM copy-protected DVD-Audio is played back, video and audio signals may not be output depending on the type of the DVD player.

•This unit is not compatible with HDCP-incompatible HDMI or DVI components.

•To decode audio bitstream signals on this unit, set the input source component appropriately so that the component outputs the bitstream audio signals

directly (does not decode the bitstream signals on the component). Refer to the supplied instruction manuals for details.

•This unit is not compatible with the audio commentary features (for example, the special audio contents downloaded via Internet) of Blu-ray Disc or HD

DVD. This unit does not play back the audio commentaries of the Blu-ray Disc or HD DVD contents.

Video signals

This unit is compatible with the video signals of the following resolutions:

•480i/60 Hz

•576i/50 Hz

•480p/60 Hz

•576p/50 Hz

•720p/60 Hz, 50 Hz

•1080i/60 Hz, 50 Hz

•1080p/60 Hz, 50 Hz, 24 Hz

Information on HDMI™

Audio signal types Audio signal formats Compatible media

2ch Linear PCM 2ch, 32 to 192 kHz, 16/20/24 bit CD, DVD-Video, DVD-Audio, etc.

Multi-ch Linear PCM 8ch, 32 to 192 kHz, 16/20/24 bit DVD-Audio, Blu-ray Disc, HD DVD, etc.

DSD 2/5.1ch, 2.8224 MHz, 1 bit SA-CD, etc.

Bitstream Dolby Digital, DTS DVD-Video, etc.

Bitstream (High definition audio) Dolby TrueHD, Dolby Digital Plus, DTS-HD

Master Audio, DTS-HD High Resolution Audio,

DTS Express

Blu-ray Disc, HD DVD, etc.

93 En

English

INTRODUCTION APPENDIX

PREPARATION

BASIC

OPERATION

ADVANCED

OPERATION

AUDIO SECTION

• Minimum RMS Output Power for Front, Center, Surround,

Surround back

20 Hz to 20 kHz, 0.08% THD, 8 Ω...................................... 130 W

• Dynamic Power (IHF)

Front Speakers 8/6/4/2 Ω.................................160/200/260/330 W

• Maximum Useful Output Power (JEITA)

[General, China, Korea, Australia and Asia models]

1 kHz, 10% THD, 8 Ω.......................................................... 175 W

• Maximum Output Power [U.K, Europe and Russia models]

1 kHz, 0.7% THD, 4 Ω......................................................... 180 W

• Dynamic Headroom [U.S.A. and Canada models]

8 Ω........................................................................................ 0.9 dB

• IEC Output Power [U.K, Europe and Russia models]

Front Speakers 1 kHz, 0.08% THD, 8 Ω.............................. 130 W

• Damping Factor (IHF)

Front Speakers, 20 Hz to 20 kHz, 8 Ω......................... 100 or more

• Input Sensitivity/Input Impedance

PHONO ................................................................... 3.5 mV/47 kΩ

AV5, etc. ................................................................. 200 mV/47 kΩ

• Maximum Input Voltage

PHONO (1 kHz, 0.1% THD).................................. 60 mV or more

AV5, etc. (1 kHz, 0.5% THD) .................................. 2.3 V or more

• Rated Output Voltage/Output Impedance

AUDIO OUT ......................................................... 200 mV/1.2 kΩ

PRE OUT....................................................................1.0 V/1.2 kΩ

SUBWOOFER (2ch Stereo, Front Speaker: Small)

.................................................................................1.0 V/1.2 kΩ

ZONE2/3 OUT ...................................................... 200 mV/1.4 kΩ

• Headphone Jack Rated Output/Impedance

AV5, etc. (1 kHz, 50 mV, 8 Ω) ............................... 100 mV/470 Ω

• Frequency Response

AV5 to FRONT.................................. 10 Hz to 100 kHz, +0/–3 dB

• RIAA Equalization Deviation

PHONO ..........................................................................0 ± 0.5 dB

• Total Harmonic Distortion

PHONO to AUDIO OUT

(20 Hz to 20 kHz, 1 V) ........................................... 0.02% or less

AV5, etc. to FRONT, Pure Direct

(20 Hz to 20 kHz, 50 W, 8 Ω)................................. 0.06% or less

• Signal to Noise Ratio (IHF-A Network)

PHONO Input Shorted (5.0 mV to AUDIO OUT)

[U.S.A., Canada, General and China models] ......... 86 dB or more

[Other models] ......................................................... 81 dB or more

AV5, etc. Input Shorted (250 mV to Front Speakers)

............................................................................ 100 dB or more

• Residual Noise (IHF-A Network)

Front Speakers ......................................................... 150 µV or less

• Channel Separation (1 kHz/10 kHz)

PHONO (Input Shorted) ................................60 dB/55 dB or more

AV5, etc. (5.1 kΩ shortened) .........................60 dB/45 dB or more

• Volume Control...................................... Mute / –80 dB to +16.5 dB

• Tone Control (Front Speakers)

Bass Boost/Cut ..................................................... ±10 dB at 50 Hz

Bass Turnover Frequency .................................................... 350 Hz

Treble Boost/Cut................................................. ±10 dB at 20 kHz

Treble Turnover Frequency................................................. 3.5 kHz

• Filter Characteristics (fc=40/60/80/90/100/110/120/160/200 Hz)

H.P.F. (Front, Center, Surround, Surround back: Small)

..................................................................................... 12 dB/oct.

L.P.F. (Subwoofer).......................................................... 24 dB/oct.

VIDEO SECTION

• Video Signal Type (Gray Back)

[U.S.A., Canada, General and Korea models] ...................... NTSC

[Other models] ......................................................................... PAL

• Video Signal Type (Video Conversion)............................NTSC/PAL

• Signal Level

Composite ................................................................... 1 Vp-p/75 Ω

S-video [U.K., Europe and Russia models]

........................................1 Vp-p/75 Ω (Y), 0.286 Vp-p/75 Ω (C)

Component ..................... 1 Vp-p/75 Ω (Y), 0.7 Vp-p/75Ω (Cb/Cr)

• Maximum Input Level (Video Conversion: Off)

............................................................................. 1.5 Vp-p or more

• Signal to Noise Ratio .................................................. 50 dB or more

• Frequency Response [MONITOR OUT]

Component (Video Conversion: Off)

.................................................................5 Hz to 60 MHz, –3 dB

FM SECTION

• Tuning Range

[U.S.A. and Canada models]............................. 87.5 to 107.9 MHz

[General and Asia models]..........87.5/87.50 to 108.0/108.00 MHz

[Other models] .............................................. 87.50 to 108.00 MHz

• 50 dB Quieting Sensitivity (IHF)

Mono ...................................................................3.0 µV (20.8 dBf)

• Signal to Noise Ratio (IHF)

Mono/Stereo................................................................74 dB/70 dB

HD [U.S.A. model] ................................................................80 dB

• Harmonic Distortion (1 kHz)

Mono/Stereo......................................................................0.3/0.3%

HD [U.S.A. model] ...............................................................0.03%

• Antenna Input (unbalanced)....................................................... 75 Ω

AM SECTION

• Tuning Range

[U.S.A. and Canada models]................................ 530 to 1710 kHz

[General and Asia models]................... 530/531 to 1710/1611 kHz

[Other models] ..................................................... 531 to 1611 kHz

GENERAL

• Power Supply

[U.S.A. and Canada models]................................AC 120 V, 60 Hz

[General model] ................ AC 110/120/220/230–240 V, 50/60 Hz

[China model] ......................................................AC 220 V, 50 Hz

[Korea model] ......................................................AC 220 V, 60 Hz

[Australia model] .................................................AC 240 V, 50 Hz

[U.K., Europe and Russia models].......................AC 230 V, 50 Hz

[Asia model].....................................AC 220/230–240 V, 50/60 Hz

• Power Consumption

[U.S.A. and Canada models]................................... 450 W/560 VA

[Other models] ..................................................................... 450 W

• Standby Power Consumption (reference data)

(HDMI Control/Standby Through/Network Standby: Off,

RS232C STBY: No) ................................................ 0.2 W or less

(HDMI Control/Standby Through/Network Standby: On)

No Repeat................................................................ 5.6 W or less

Repeat.................................................................... 10.6 W or less

• Maximum Power Consumption

[General and Asia models]................................................... 680 W

• Dimensions (W x H x D) .................................. 435 x 171 x 365 mm

(17-1/8 x 6-3/4 x 14-3/8 in)

• Weight .................................................................... 12.4 kg (27.4 lbs)

* Specifications are subject to change without notice.

Specifications

94 En

■Numerics

2ch Stereo, sound field program .................... 28

5.1-channel speaker layout ............................ 10

6.1-channel speaker layout ............................ 10

7.1-channel speaker layout ............................ 10

7ch Enhancer, sound field program ............... 29

7ch Stereo, sound field program .................... 29

■A

AC IN, rear panel ............................................. 5

Account Status, Rhapsody Information,

Function Setup .......................................... 65

Action Game, sound field program ............... 28

Adaptive DRC, Volume, Function Setup ...... 63

Adjusting high frequency sound .................... 25

Adjusting low frequency sound ..................... 25

Advanced setup .............................................. 73

Adventure, sound field program .................... 27

All Channel Search mode,

SIRIUS Satellite Radio ............................. 40

All Channel Search mode,

XM Satellite Radio ................................... 36

AM antenna connection ................................. 20

AM tuning ..................................................... 31

Analog audio jack .......................................... 13

ANALOG MONITOR OUT, Lipsync,

Sound Setup .............................................. 62

ANTENNA terminal, rear panel ...................... 5

Aspect, HDMI, Function Setup ..................... 63

AUDIO 1/2 jack, rear panel ............................. 5

Audio and video player connection ............... 16

Audio jack ..................................................... 13

Audio Mode, Option menu ............................ 55

AUDIO OUT jack, rear panel .......................... 5

Audio Output, HDMI, Function Setup .......... 62

Audio player connection ................................ 17

Audio program, HD Radio ............................ 33

Auto Preset, Option menu ............................. 55

Auto Setup (YPAO), troubleshooting ........... 86

Auto Setup, Speaker Setup ............................ 59

Automatic setup ............................................. 21

AV 1-6 jack, rear panel .................................... 5

AV OUT jack, rear panel ................................. 5

■B

BAND (CATEGORY), front panel ................. 4

Bass Crossover Frequency, Manual Setup,

Speaker Setup ........................................... 61

BI AMP, advanced setup ............................... 73

Bi-amplification connection .......................... 12

Bluetooth component playback ..................... 46

Bluetooth wireless audio receiver

connection ................................................. 18

Bluetooth, troubleshooting ............................ 83

■C

Category Search mode,

SIRIUS Satellite Radio ............................. 40

Category Search mode,

XM Satellite Radio ................................... 36

Cellar Club, sound field program .................. 28

Center Image, DSP Parameter ....................... 68

Center Level, DSP Parameter ........................ 68

Center speaker ............................................... 10

Center Speaker, Manual Setup,

Speaker Setup ........................................... 60

Center Width, DSP Parameter ....................... 68

Chamber, sound field program ...................... 28

Changing information on the front panel

display ....................................................... 26

CINEMA DSP 3D ......................................... 30

CINEMA DSP 3D indicator,

front panel display ...................................... 6

CINEMA DSP indicator,

front panel display ...................................... 6

Clear Preset, Option menu ............................. 55

COAXIAL jack .............................................. 13

CODE SET, remote control ............................. 7

COMPONENT VIDEO jack ..........................13

Connect, Option menu ...................................56

Connecting AM antenna ................................20

Connecting audio and video player ................16

Connecting audio player ................................17

Connecting Bluetooth wireless audio

receiver ......................................................18

Connecting external amplifier ........................18

Connecting external decoder ..........................18

Connecting FM antenna .................................20

Connecting iPod universal dock ....................18

Connecting multi-format player .....................18

Connecting power cable .................................20

Connecting projector ......................................14

Connecting set-top box ..................................16

Connecting SiriusConnect tuner ....................39

Connecting speaker ........................................11

Connecting speaker cable ...............................12

Connecting to network ...................................19

Connecting TV monitor .................................14

Connecting USB storage device ....................19

Connecting XM Mini-Tuner Home Dock ......35

Connecting Zone2 ..........................................69

Connecting Zone3 ..........................................69

Connections ....................................................10

Controlling other component,

remote control ...........................................72

Controlling Zone2 ..........................................71

Controlling Zone3 ..........................................71

Cursor indicator, front panel display ................6

Cursor // /

knlh, remote control .................7

■D

Decode Type, DSP Parameter ........................68

Decoder Mode, Option menu .........................54

Dialogue Lift, DSP Parameter .......................66

DIGITAL AUDIO jack, rear panel ..................5

Dimension, DSP Parameter ............................68

Dimmer, Display, Function Setup ..................63

Direct number access,

SIRIUS Satellite Radio ..............................40

Direct number access, XM Satellite Radio ....36

Direct, DSP Parameter ...................................68

Disconnect, Option menu ...............................56

Display, Function Setup .................................63

DISPLAY, remote control ...............................7

DOCK terminal, rear panel ..............................5

Drama, sound field program ..........................28

DSP Level, DSP Parameter ............................65

DSP Parameter, Setup menu ..........................65

Dynamic Range, Sound Setup .......................62

■E

Effect Level, DSP Parameter .........................68

ENTER, remote control ...................................7

EQ Type Select, Manual Setup,

Speaker Setup ............................................61

Equalizer, Manual Setup, Speaker Setup .......61

Extended Surround, Option menu ..................54

External amplifier connection ........................18

External component operation key, remote

control ..........................................................7

Extra Speaker Assignment, Manual Setup,

Speaker Setup ............................................60

■F

FM antenna connection ..................................20

FM tuning .......................................................31

Frequency tuning ............................................31

Front left speaker ...........................................10

Front panel .......................................................4

Front panel display ...........................................6

Front Panel Display Scroll, Display,

Function Setup ...........................................63

Front panel display, front panel .......................4

Front Speaker, Manual Setup,

Speaker Setup ............................................60

Function Setup, Setup menu ..........................62

■G

General, troubleshooting ............................... 75

GEQ, Manual Setup, Speaker Setup .............. 61

GND terminal, rear panel ................................ 5

GUI Position, Display, Function Setup ......... 63

■H

Hall in Munich, sound field program ............ 28

Hall in Vienna, sound field program ............. 28

HD indicator, front panel display .................... 6

HD Radio ....................................................... 33

HD Radio audio program .............................. 33

HD Radio key, remote control ......................... 7

HD Radio reception, troubleshooting ............ 79

HDMI 1-4 jack, rear panel ............................... 5

HDMI control ................................................ 53

HDMI Control, HDMI, Function Setup ........ 62

HDMI indicator, front panel display ............... 6

HDMI information ......................................... 92

HDMI jack ..................................................... 13

HDMI OUT 1/2 jack, rear panel ...................... 5

HDMI OUT jack, select ................................. 53

HDMI OUT, remote control ............................ 7

HDMI OUT1, Lipsync, Sound Setup ............ 62

HDMI OUT2, Lipsync, Sound Setup ............ 62

HDMI THROUGH, front panel ....................... 4

HDMI, Function Setup .................................. 62

HDMI, troubleshooting ................................. 78

Headphones, use ............................................ 26

Hi-fi sound playback ..................................... 25

High frequency sound adjustment ................. 25

■I

INFO, front panel ............................................ 4

INFO, remote control ...................................... 7

Information, Network, Function Setup .......... 65

INIT, advanced setup ..................................... 73

Initial Delay, DSP Parameter ......................... 66

Initial Volume, Volume, Function Setup ....... 64

Input Rename, Function Setup ...................... 64

Input selection key, remote control ................. 7

INPUT selector, front panel ............................. 4

Installing batteries, remote control .................. 6

Internal signal flow ........................................ 17

Internet Radio content playback .................... 50

IP Address, Network, Function Setup ........... 64

iPod playback ................................................ 44

iPod universal dock connection ..................... 18

iPod, troubleshooting ..................................... 83

iTunes Tagging, HD Radio ............................ 33

iTunes Tagging, troubleshooting ................... 80

■L

LFE / Bass Out, Manual Setup,

Speaker Setup ........................................... 60

Lipsync, Sound Setup .................................... 62

Liveness, DSP Parameter .............................. 67

Low frequency sound adjustment .................. 25

■M

MAC Address Filter, Network,

Function Setup .......................................... 64

MAIN ZONE ON/OFF, front panel ................ 4

Manual Setup, Speaker Setup ........................ 59

Max Volume, Volume, Function Setup ......... 64

Memory Guard, Setup menu ......................... 68

MEMORY, front panel .................................... 4

MON.CHK, advanced setup .......................... 73

MONITOR OUT jack, rear panel .................... 5

Mono Movie, sound field program ................ 28

MULTI CH INPUT jack, rear panel ................ 5

Multi information display,

front panel display ...................................... 6

Multi-format player connection ..................... 18

Multi-zone configuration ............................... 69

Music Video, sound field program ................ 28

MUTE indicator, front panel display ............... 6

MUTE, remote control .................................... 7

Index

95 En

English

INTRODUCTION APPENDIX

PREPARATION

BASIC

OPERATION

ADVANCED

OPERATION

Muting audio output .......................................25

■N

Neo:6 Cinema, sound field program ..............29

Neo:6 Music, sound field program .................29

NET FirmUpdate, advanced setup .................73

Network connection .......................................19

NETWORK port, rear panel ............................5

Network Standby, Network,

Function Setup ...........................................65

Network, Function Setup ...............................64

Network, trouble shooting ..............................84

Neural Sur., sound field program ...................29

Numeric key, remote control ............................7

■O

ON SCREEN, remote control ..........................7

Operation range, remote control ......................6

OPTICAL jack ...............................................13

OPTIMIZER MIC jack, front panel .................4

Option menu ...................................................54

OPTION, remote control ..................................7

OUT 1/OUT 2 indicator,

front panel display .......................................6

■P

P. Initial Delay, DSP Parameter .....................66

P. Liveness, DSP Parameter ...........................67

P. Room Size, DSP Parameter .......................66

Pairing Bluetooth component .........................46

Pairing, Option menu .....................................56

Panorama, DSP Parameter .............................68

Parental Lock, Option menu ..........................55

PC music content playback ............................48

PHONES jack, front panel ...............................4

PHONO jack, rear panel ..................................5

Placing speaker ...............................................10

PLII Game, sound field program ...................29

PLII Movie, sound field program ...................29

PLII Music, sound field program ...................29

PLIIx Game, sound field program .................29

PLIIx Movie, sound field program .................29

PLIIx Music, sound field program .................29

Power cable connection ..................................20

POWER, remote control ..................................7

PRE OUT jack, rear panel ................................5

Presence L Level, DSP Parameter .................68

Presence left speaker ......................................11

Presence R Level, DSP Parameter .................68

Presence right speaker ....................................11

PRESET l/h, front panel ..............................4

Preset Search mode,

SIRIUS Satellite Radio ..............................41

Preset Search mode,

XM Satellite Radio ....................................37

Preset tuning ...................................................31

Pro Logic, sound field program .....................29

PROGRAM selector, front panel .....................4

Projector connection .......................................14

PURE DIRECT, front panel .............................4

■R

Rear panel .........................................................5

Receiving remote control signal .....................18

Refresh, Option menu ....................................56

Registering SIRIUS Satellite Radio

channel ......................................................41

Registering XM Satellite Radio channel ........37

Remote control .................................................6

Remote control code resetting ........................72

Remote control code setting ...........................72

Remote control ID setting ..............................74

Remote control signal transmitter, remote

control ..........................................................7

Remote control, troubleshooting ....................82

REMOTE ID, advanced setup ........................73

REMOTE IN/OUT jack, rear panel .................5

Remove Account, Rhapsody Information,

Function Setup ...........................................65

Repeat, Option menu ......................................55

Replacing the battery,

simplified remote control ............................ 8

Resetting remote control code ....................... 72

Resolution, HDMI, Function Setup ............... 63

RETURN, remote control ................................ 7

Reverb Delay, DSP Parameter ....................... 67

Reverb Level, DSP Parameter ....................... 68

Reverb Time, DSP Parameter ........................ 67

Rhapsody content playback ........................... 51

Rhapsody Free Trial, Rhapsody Information,

Function Setup .......................................... 65

Rhapsody Information, Function Setup ......... 65

Roleplaying Game, sound field program ....... 28

Room Size, DSP Parameter ........................... 66

RS232C STBY, advanced setup .................... 73

RS-232C terminal, rear panel .......................... 5

■S

SCENE function ............................................ 24

SCENE IR, advanced setup ........................... 73

SCENE, front panel ......................................... 4

SCENE, remote control ................................... 7

Sci-Fi, sound field program ........................... 27

Selecting HDMI OUT jack ............................ 53

Selecting source on GUI screen ..................... 25

Selection SCENE ........................................... 24

Setting Parental Lock,

SIRIUS Satellite Radio ............................. 42

Setting remote control code ........................... 72

Setting remote control ID .............................. 74

Set-top box connection .................................. 16

Setup menu .................................................... 57

Setup menu, basic operation .......................... 59

Shuffle, Option menu ..................................... 55

Function Setup .......................................... 65

Signal Info, Option menu .............................. 55

SILENT CINEMA ......................................... 30

Simplified remote control ................................ 8

SIRIUS indicator, front panel display ............. 6

SIRIUS jack, rear panel ................................... 5

SIRIUS Satellite Radio tuning ....................... 39

SIRIUS Satellite Radio, troubleshooting ....... 81

SiriusConnect tuner connection ..................... 39

SLEEP indicator, front panel display ..............6

Sleep timer ..................................................... 53

SLEEP, remote control .................................... 7

Sound field program ...................................... 27

Sound selection key, remote control ................ 7

Sound Setup, Setup menu .............................. 62

SOURCE POWER, remote control ................. 7

Source selection, GUI screen ......................... 25

SP IMP., advanced setup ............................... 73

Speaker cable connection .............................. 12

Speaker Configuration, Manual Setup,

Speaker Setup ........................................... 59

Speaker connection ........................................ 11

Speaker Distance, Manual Setup,

Speaker Setup ........................................... 61

Speaker indicator, front panel display ............. 6

Speaker layout ............................................... 10

Speaker Level, Manual Setup,

Speaker Setup ........................................... 61

Speaker placement ......................................... 10

Speaker Setup, Setup menu ........................... 59

SPEAKERS terminal, rear panel ..................... 5

Specifications ................................................. 93

Spectacle, sound field program ...................... 27

Sports, sound field program ........................... 28

SR PIN, advanced setup ................................ 73

Standard, sound field program ....................... 27

Standby Through, HDMI, Function Setup .... 62

Straight decode mode .................................... 30

Straight Enhancer, sound field program ........ 29

STRAIGHT, front panel .................................. 4

Sub-input selection key, remote control .......... 7

Subwoofer ...................................................... 10

Subwoofer Phase, Manual Setup,

Speaker Setup ........................................... 61

Sur. Back Initial Delay, DSP Parameter ........ 66

Sur. Back Liveness, DSP Parameter .............. 67

Sur. Back Room Size, DSP Parameter .......... 66

Sur. Initial Delay, DSP Parameter ................. 66

Sur. Liveness, DSP Parameter ....................... 67

Sur. Room Size, DSP Parameter ................... 66

Surround back left speaker ............................ 10

Surround Back Level, DSP Parameter .......... 68

Surround back right speaker .......................... 10

Surround back speaker .................................. 10

Surround Back Speaker, Manual Setup,

Speaker Setup ........................................... 60

Surround L Level, DSP Parameter ................ 68

Surround left speaker .................................... 10

Surround R Level, DSP Parameter ................ 68

Surround right speaker .................................. 10

Surround Speaker, Manual Setup,

Speaker Setup ........................................... 60

■T

TAG indicator, front panel display ................. 6

Test Tone, Manual Setup, Speaker Setup ..... 61

The Bottom Line, sound field program ......... 28

The Roxy Theatre, sound field program ....... 28

Tone control .................................................. 25

TONE CONTROL, front panel ....................... 4

TRANSMIT, remote control ........................... 7

Transmitting remote control signal ............... 18

TRIGGER OUT 1/2 jack, rear panel ............... 5

Tuner (FM/AM), troubleshooting ................. 79

Tuner indicator, front panel display ................ 6

Tuner key, remote control ............................... 7

Tuning, AM ................................................... 31

Tuning, FM .................................................... 31

TUNING/CH l/h ......................................... 4

Turning off .................................................... 20

Turning on ..................................................... 20

TV control key, remote control ....................... 7

TV monitor connection ................................. 14

■U

Unit, Manual Setup, Speaker Setup .............. 61

USB FirmUpdate, advanced setup ................ 73

USB port, front panel ...................................... 4

USB storage device connection ..................... 19

USB storage device playback ........................ 47

USB, troubleshooting .................................... 84

■V

VER, advanced setup .................................... 73

VIDEO AUX jack, front panel ........................ 4

VIDEO jack ................................................... 13

Video jack ..................................................... 13

Video Out, Option menu ............................... 56

Video/audio jack ........................................... 13

Virtual CINEMA DSP .................................. 30

VOLUME +/-, remote control ......................... 7

VOLUME control, front panel ........................ 4

VOLUME indicator, front panel display ......... 6

Volume Trim, Option menu .......................... 54

Volume, Function Setup ................................ 63

■X

XM indicator, front panel display ................... 6

XM jack, rear panel ......................................... 5

XM Mini-Tuner Home Dock connection ...... 35

XM Satellite Radio tuning ............................. 35

XM Satellite Radio, troubleshooting ............. 80

■Y

YPAO ............................................................ 21

■Z

ZONE CONTROLS, front panel ..................... 4

Zone selection switch, remote control ............. 7

Zone, Function Setup .................................... 64

Zone2 connection .......................................... 69

Zone2 Initial Volume, Zone,

Function Setup .......................................... 64

Zone2 Max Volume, Zone,

Function Setup .......................................... 64

ZONE2 ON/OFF, front panel .......................... 4

Index

96 En

ZONE2/3 OUT jack, rear panel ....................... 5

ZONE2/ZONE3 indicator,

front panel display ...................................... 6

Zone3 connection .......................................... 69

Zone3 Initial Volume, Zone,

Function Setup .......................................... 64

Zone3 Max Volume, Zone,

Function Setup .......................................... 64

ZONE3 ON/OFF, front panel .......................... 4

“LMAIN ZONE ON/OFF” or

“dHDMI” (example) indicates

the name of the parts on the front

panel or the remote control. Refer

to “Part names and functions” on

page 4.

Information about software

This product uses the following free software.

For information (copyright, etc) about each software, read the original sentences stated

below.

About curl

purpose with or without fee is hereby granted, provided that the above copyright notice

and this permission notice appear in all copies.

THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED “AS IS”, WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND,

EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE

WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR

PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT OF THIRD PARTY RIGHTS. IN NO

EVENT SHALL THE AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR

ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF

CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN

CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN

THE SOFTWARE.

Except as contained in this notice, the name of a copyright holder shall not be used in

advertising or otherwise to promote the sale, use or other dealings in this Software

without prior written authorization of the copyright holder.

Institute of Technology, Stockholm, Sweden).

Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are

permitted provided that the following conditions are met:

1 Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of

conditions and the following disclaimer.

2 Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of

conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials

provided with the distribution.

3 Neither the name of the Institute nor the names of its contributors may be used to

endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written

permission.

THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE INSTITUTE AND CONTRIBUTORS

“AS IS” AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT

NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND

FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT

SHALL THE INSTITUTE OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT,

INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL

DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF

SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR

BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF

LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT

(INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF

THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF

SUCH DAMAGE.

About lwip

Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are

permitted provided that the following conditions are met:

1 Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of

conditions and the following disclaimer.

2 Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of

conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials

provided with the distribution.

3 The name of the author may not be used to endorse or promote products derived from

this software without specific prior written permission.

THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE AUTHOR “AS IS” AND ANY EXPRESS

OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE

IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A

PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE

AUTHOR BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL,

EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT

LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS

OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER

CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT,

STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE)

ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF

ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.

Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are

permitted provided that the following conditions are met:

1 Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of

conditions and the following disclaimer.

2 Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of

conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials

provided with the distribution.

3 Neither the name of CITEL Technologies Ltd nor the names of its contributors may

be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific

prior written permission.

THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY CITEL TECHNOLOGIES AND

CONTRIBUTORS “AS IS” AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES,

INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF

MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE

DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL CITEL TECHNOLOGIES OR

CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL,

SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT

NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES;

LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER

CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT,

STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE)

ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF

ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.

The authors hereby grant permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and license this

software and its documentation for any purpose, provided that existing copyright notices

are retained in all copies and that this notice and the following disclaimer are included

verbatim in any distributions. No written agreement, license, or royalty fee is required

for any of the authorized uses.

THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE CONTRIBUTORS “AS IS” AND ANY

EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,

THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A

PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE

CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL,

SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT

NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES;

LOSS OF USE DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER

CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT,

STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE)

ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF

ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.

Redistribution and use in source and binary forms are permitted provided that the above

documentation, advertising materials, and other materials related to such distribution

and use acknowledge that the software was developed by the Australian National

University. The name of the University may not be used to endorse or promote products

derived from this software without specific prior written permission.

THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED “AS IS” AND WITHOUT ANY EXPRESS OR

IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, THE IMPLIED

WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTIBILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR

PURPOSE.

Redistribution and use in source and binary forms are permitted provided that the above

documentation, advertising materials, and other materials related to such distribution

and use acknowledge that the software was developed by Carnegie Mellon University.

The name of the University may not be used to endorse or promote products derived

from this software without specific prior written permission.

THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED “AS IS” AND WITHOUT ANY EXPRESS OR

IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, THE IMPLIED

WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTIBILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR

PURPOSE.

Redistribution and use in source and binary forms are permitted provided that the above

documentation, advertising materials, and other materials related to such distribution

and use acknowledge that the software was developed by Gregory M. Christy. The name

of the author may not be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software

without specific prior written permission.

THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED “AS IS” AND WITHOUT ANY EXPRESS OR

IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, THE IMPLIED

WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTIBILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR

PURPOSE.

Redistribution and use in source and binary forms are permitted provided that the above

documentation, advertising materials, and other materials related to such distribution

and use acknowledge that the software was developed by Eric Rosenquist. The name of

the author may not be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software

without specific prior written permission.

THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED “AS IS” AND WITHOUT ANY EXPRESS OR

IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, THE IMPLIED

WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTIBILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR

PURPOSE.

License to copy and use this software is granted provided that it is identified as the

“RSA Data Security, Inc. MD5 Message-Digest Algorithm” in all material mentioning

or referencing this software or this function.

License is also granted to make and use derivative works provided that such works are

identified as “derived from the RSA Data Security, Inc. MD5 Message-Digest

Algorithm” in all material mentioning or referencing the derived work.

RSA Data Security, Inc. makes no representations concerning either the merchantability

of this software or the suitability of this software for any particular purpose. It is

provided “AS IS” without express or implied warranty of any kind.

These notices must be retained in any copies of any part of this documentation and/or

software.

Redistribution and use in source and binary forms are permitted provided that the above

documentation, advertising materials, and other materials related to such distribution

and use acknowledge that the software was developed by the University of California,

Berkeley. The name of the University may not be used to endorse or promote products

derived from this software without specific prior written permission.

THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED “AS IS” AND WITHOUT ANY EXPRESS OR

IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, THE IMPLIED

WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTIBILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR

PURPOSE.

About OpenSSL

LICENSE ISSUES

The OpenSSL toolkit stays under a dual license, i.e. both the conditions of the OpenSSL

License and the original SSLeay license apply to the toolkit. See below for the actual

license texts. Actually both licenses are BSD-style Open Source licenses. In case of any

license issues related to OpenSSL please contact openssl-core@openssl.org.

OpenSSL License

Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are

permitted provided that the following conditions are met:

1 Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of

conditions and the following disclaimer.

2 Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of

conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials

provided with the distribution.

3 All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display the

following acknowledgment:

“This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project for use in the

OpenSSL Toolkit. (http://www.openssl.org/)”

4 The names “OpenSSL Toolkit” and “OpenSSL Project” must not be used to endorse

or promote products derived from this software without prior written permission. For

written permission, please contact openssl-core@openssl.org.

5 Products derived from this software may not be called “OpenSSL” nor may

“OpenSSL” appear in their names without prior written permission of the OpenSSL

Project.

6 Redistributions of any form whatsoever must retain the following acknowledgment:

“This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project for use in the

OpenSSL Toolkit (http://www.openssl.org/)”

THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE OpenSSL PROJECT “AS IS” AND ANY

EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,

THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A

PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE

OpenSSL PROJECT OR ITS CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT,

INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, XEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL

DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF

SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR

BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF

LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT

(INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF

THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF

SUCH DAMAGE.

This product includes cryptographic software written by Eric Young

(eay@cryptsoft.com). This product includes software written by Tim Hudson

(tjh@cryptsoft.com).

Original SSLeay License

This package is an SSL implementation written by Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com).

The implementation was written so as to conform with Netscapes SSL.

This library is free for commercial and non-commercial use as long as the following

conditions are aheared to. The following conditions apply to all code found in this

distribution, be it the RC4, RSA, lhash, DES, etc., code; not just the SSL code. The SSL

documentation included with this distribution is covered by the same copyright terms

except that the holder is Tim Hudson (tjh@cryptsoft.com).

to be removed. If this package is used in a product, Eric Young should be given

attribution as the author of the parts of the library used. This can be in the form of a

textual message at program startup or in documentation (online or textual) provided with

the package.

Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are

permitted provided that the following conditions are met:

1 Redistributions of source code must retain the copyright notice, this list of conditions

and the following disclaimer.

2 Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of

conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials

provided with the distribution.

3 All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display the

following acknowledgement:

“This product includes cryptographic software written by Eric Young

(eay@cryptsoft.com)”

The word ‘cryptographic’ can be left out if the rouines from the library being used are

not cryptographic related :-).

4 If you include any Windows specific code (or a derivative thereof) from the apps

directory (application code) you must include an acknowledgement:

“This product includes software written by Tim Hudson (tjh@cryptsoft.com)”

THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY ERIC YOUNG “AS IS” AND ANY EXPRESS

OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE

IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A

PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE

AUTHOR OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT,

INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES

(INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE

GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS

INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY,

WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING

NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF

THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH

DAMAGE.

The licence and distribution terms for any publically available version or derivative of

this code cannot be changed. i.e. this code cannot simply be copied and put under

another distribution licence [including the GNU Public Licence.]

About FLAC codec library

Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are

permitted provided that the following conditions are met:

–Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of

conditions and the following disclaimer.

–Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of

conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials

provided with the distribution.

–Neither the name of the Xiph.org Foundation nor the names of its contributors may

be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific

prior written permission.

THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND

CONTRIBUTORS “AS IS” AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES,

INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF

MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE

DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE FOUNDATION OR CONTRIBUTORS

BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL,

EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT

LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS

OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER

CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT,

STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE)

ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF

ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.

About Vorbis library

Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are

permitted provided that the following conditions are met:

–Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of

conditions and the following disclaimer.

–Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of

conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials

provided with the distribution.

–Neither the name of the Xiphophorus nor the names of its contributors may be used to

endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written

permission.

THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND

CONTRIBUTORS “AS IS” AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES,

INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF

MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE

DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE REGENTS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE

LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY,

OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,

PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA,

OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON

ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY,

OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY

OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE

POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.

Notice for Windows Media DRM

The Certified For Windows Vista logo, Windows Media and the Windows logo are

trademarks or registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States

and/or other countries.

Content providers are using the digital rights management technology for

Windows Media contained in this device (WMDRM) to protect the integrity of

their content (Secure Content) so that their intellectual property, including

This device uses WM-DRM software to play Secure Content (WM-DRM

Software).

If the security of the WM-DRM Software in this device has been compromised,

owners of Secure Content (Secure Content Owners) may request that Microsoft

revoke the WM-DRM Software s right to acquire new licenses to copy, display

and/or play Secure Content. Revocation does not alter the WMDRM Software s

ability to play unprotected content. A list of revoked WM-DRM Software is sent

to your device whenever you download a license for Secure Content from the

Internet or from a PC. Microsoft may, in conjunction with such license, also

download revocation list onto your device on behalf of Secure Content Owners.

iii

List of remote control codes

A.R. Systems 0274

Acme 0260

Acura 0261, 0273

ADC 0259

Admiral 0100, 0224, 0257,

0258, 0259, 0264,

0265

Advent 0204

Adventura 0107

Adyson 0260, 0327, 0328

Agashi 0327, 0328

Agazi 0259

Aiko 0260, 0261, 0273,

0274, 0327, 0328

Aim 0274

Aiwa 0028, 0297

Akai 0063, 0096, 0101,

0205, 0231, 0261,

0262, 0268, 0271,

0273, 0274, 0327,

0328

Akiba 0262, 0274

Akura 0259, 0262, 0273,

0274

Alaron 0327

Alba 0243, 0260, 0261,

0262, 0266, 0269,

0271, 0273, 0274,

0294, 0300, 0327

Albatron 0222

Alcyon 0249

Alleron 0105

Allorgan 0328

Allstar 0268, 0274

America Action

0225

AMOi 0326

Amplivision 0243, 0260, 0275,

0328

Amstrad 0259, 0261, 0262,

0273, 0274

Amtron 0104

Anam 0225, 0261

Anam National

0102, 0104

Anglo 0261, 0273

Anitech 0249, 0259, 0261,

0273, 0274

Ansonic 0243, 0250, 0261,

0263, 0273, 0274

AOC 0072, 0090, 0096,

0103

Apex 0061, 0117, 0139

Arcam 0327, 0328

Arcam Delta 0260

Aristona 0268, 0271, 0274

Arthur Martin 0275

ASA 0257, 0265

Asberg 0249, 0268, 0274

Astra 0261

Asuka 0259, 0260, 0262,

0327, 0328

Atlantic 0260, 0268, 0271,

0274, 0327

Atori 0261, 0273

Auchan 0275

Audiosonic 0243, 0260, 0261,

0262, 0268, 0271,

0274, 0328

AudioTon 0243, 0260, 0328

Audiovox 0104, 0144, 0225

Ausind 0249

Autovox 0249, 0257, 0259,

0260, 0328

Aventura 0097

Awa 0327, 0328

Axion 0206

Baird 0328

Bang & Olufsen

0230, 0257

Basic Line 0261, 0262, 0268,

0273, 0274, 0328

Bastide 0260, 0328

Baur 0271, 0274

Bazin 0328

Beko 0243, 0269, 0274,

0282, 0351, 0357,

0372, 0380

Belcor 0090

Bell & Howell

0065, 0100

Benq 0051, 0160, 0315

Beon 0268, 0271, 0274

Best 0243

Bestar 0243, 0268, 0274

Binatone 0260, 0328

Blue Sky 0262, 0274

Blue Star 0270

Boots 0260, 0328

BPL 0270, 0274

Bradford 0104, 0225

Brandt 0267, 0272

Brillian 0228

Brinkmann 0274

Brionvega 0257, 0268, 0271,

0274

Britannia 0260, 0327, 0328

Brockwood 0090

Broksonic 0063, 0225

Bruns 0257

BTC 0262

Bush 0261, 0262, 0264,

0266, 0268, 0270,

0271, 0273, 0274,

0282, 0286, 0294,

0300, 0328, 0329,

0351, 0388, 0394,

0413

Candle 0072, 0090, 0096,

0107

Capsonic 0259

Carena 0274

Carnivale 0096

Carrefour 0266

Carver 0088

Cascade 0261, 0273, 0274

Casio 0317

Cathay 0268, 0271, 0274

CCE 0229, 0328

Celebrity 0057, 0101

Celera 0117

Centurion 0268, 0271, 0274

Century 0257

CGE 0243, 0249

Changhong 0117

Chimei 0323

Cimline 0261, 0273

Citizen 0072, 0085, 0090,

0096, 0104

City 0261, 0273

Clarion 0225

Clarivox 0271

Clatronic 0243, 0249, 0259,

0260, 0261, 0262,

0268, 0269, 0273,

0274, 0328

CMS 0327

CMS Hightec 0328

Coby 0151

Colortyme 0072, 0090

Commercial Solutions

0071

Concerto 0072, 0090

Concorde 0261, 0273

Condor 0243, 0260, 0268,

0269, 0273, 0274,

0327

Contec 0225, 0260, 0261,

0266, 0273, 0327

Contec/Cony 0094, 0104

Continental Edison

0267

Cosmel 0261, 0273

Craig 0104, 0225

Crosley 0088, 0119, 0249,

0257

Crown 0104, 0225, 0243,

0249, 0261, 0268,

0269, 0271, 0273,

0274

CS Electronics

0260, 0262, 0327

CTC Clatronic

0263

CTX 0159

Curtis Mathes 0065, 0071, 0072,

0085, 0088, 0090,

0096, 0099, 0224

CXC 0104, 0225

Cybertron 0262

Cytron 0202

Daewoo 0072, 0085, 0090,

0103, 0119, 0245,

0260, 0261, 0268,

0273, 0274, 0281,

0285, 0303, 0321,

0327, 0328, 0344,

0361, 0387

Dainichi 0262, 0327

Dansai 0259, 0268, 0271,

0274, 0327, 0328

Dantax 0243, 0271

Dawa 0274

Daytron 0072, 0085, 0090,

0261, 0273

De Graaf 0264

Decca 0260, 0268, 0271,

0274, 0328

Dell 0167, 0195

Denver 0308, 0312

Desmet 0268, 0271, 0274

Diamant 0274

Diamond 0327

DiamondVision

0213, 0221

Dimensia 0099

Disney 0137

Dixi 0261, 0268, 0271,

0273, 0274, 0328

Dream Vision 0415, 0416

DTS 0261, 0273

Dual 0260, 0274, 0328

Dual-Tec 0260, 0261

Dumont 0076, 0090, 0108,

0257, 0260, 0263,

0328

Durabrand 0077, 0097, 0133,

0225

Dux 0271

Dwin 0224

Dynatron 0268, 0271, 0274

Dynex 0181, 0182

Elbe 0243, 0250, 0274,

0328

Elcit 0257

Electa 0270

ELECTRO TECH

0261

Electroband 0057, 0101

Electrograph 0226

Electrohome 0072, 0090, 0101,

0102

Element 0180

Elin 0260, 0268, 0271,

0273, 0274, 0327

Elite 0262, 0268, 0274

Elman 0263

Elta 0261, 0273, 0327

Emerson 0065, 0072, 0077,

0082, 0085, 0090,

0094, 0095, 0097,

0104, 0105, 0119,

0225, 0243, 0257,

0274

Emprex 0200

Envision 0072, 0090, 0096

Epson 0156, 0201, 0309

Erres 0268, 0271, 0274

ESA 0097

ESC 0328

Etron 0261

Eurofeel 0328

Euro-Feel 0259

Euroline 0271

Euroman 0243, 0327, 0328

Euromann 0259, 0260, 0268,

0274

Europhon 0260, 0263, 0268,

0274, 0327, 0328

Expert 0275

Exquisit 0274

Fenner 0261, 0273

Ferguson 0267, 0271, 0272

Fidelity 0260, 0264, 0274,

0327

Filsai 0328

Finlandia 0264

Finlux 0249, 0257, 0260,

0263, 0268, 0271,

0274, 0328

FIRST LINE 0260, 0261, 0268

Firstline 0273, 0274, 0327,

0328

Fisher 0065, 0243, 0257,

0260, 0266, 0269,

0328

Flint 0268, 0274

Formenti 0249, 0257, 0258,

0260, 0271, 0327

Formenti/Phoenix

0327

Fortress 0257, 0258

Fraba 0243, 0274

Friac 0243

Frontech 0259, 0261, 0264,

0265, 0273, 0328

Fujitsu 0023, 0024, 0025,

0105, 0328

Fujitsu General

0328

Fujitsu Siemens

0425, 0426, 0427,

0428, 0429

Funai 0033, 0034, 0035,

0036, 0037, 0097,

0104, 0105, 0225,

0259

Futuretech 0104, 0225

Galaxi 0269, 0274

Galaxis 0243, 0274

Gateway 0163, 0226, 0227

GBC 0261, 0266, 0273

GE 0069, 0071, 0072,

0073, 0077, 0090,

0099, 0102, 0106,

0112, 0131

Geant Casino 0275

GEC 0260, 0265, 0268,

0271, 0274, 0328

Geloso 0261, 0264, 0273

General Technic

0261, 0273

Genexxa 0262, 0265, 0268,

0274

GFM 0177, 0210

Giant 0328

Gibralter 0076, 0090, 0096,

0108

GoldHand 0327

Goldline 0274

GoldStar 0072, 0077, 0085,

0090, 0094, 0096,

0103, 0243, 0260,

0261, 0264, 0268,

0271, 0273, 0274,

0327, 0328

Goodmans 0164, 0259, 0261,

0266, 0268, 0271,

0273, 0274, 0322,

0328, 0395, 0399,

0412

Gorenje 0243, 0269

GPM 0262

GPX 0211

Gradiente 0162

Graetz 0265

Granada 0249, 0260, 0264,

0266, 0268, 0271,

0274, 0275, 0328

Grandin 0261, 0262, 0270,

0271

Gronic 0328

Grundig 0242, 0243, 0249,

0274, 0356

Grunpy 0104, 0105, 0225

Haier 0187, 0207

Halifax 0259, 0260, 0327,

0328

Hallmark 0072, 0077, 0090

Hampton 0260, 0327, 0328

Hanseatic 0243, 0250, 0260,

0261, 0266, 0268,

0271, 0273, 0274,

0328

Hantarex 0261, 0273, 0274

Hantor 0274

Harman/Kardon

0088

Harvard 0104, 0225

Harwood 0273, 0274

Havermy 0224

HCM 0259, 0260, 0261,

0270, 0273, 0274,

0328

Hema 0273, 0328

Hewlett Packard

0146

Higashi 0327

HiLine 0274

Hinari 0261, 0262, 0266,

0268, 0271, 0273,

0274

Hisawa 0262, 0270, 0275

Hisense 0165

Hitachi 0006, 0014, 0015,

0016, 0042, 0072,

0090, 0094, 0173,

0254, 0255, 0256,

0260, 0264, 0265,

0266, 0274, 0285,

0300, 0319, 0328,

0348, 0349, 0385,

0402, 0410

Hornyphon 0268, 0274

Hoshai 0262

Huanyu 0260, 0327

Hygashi 0260, 0327, 0328

Hyper 0260, 0261, 0273,

0327, 0328

Hypson 0259, 0260, 0268,

0270, 0271, 0274,

0275, 0328

Hyundai 0223

Iberia 0274

ICE 0259, 0260, 0261,

0262, 0268, 0273,

0274, 0327, 0328

ICeS 0327

Ilo 0198, 0203

IMA 0104

Imperial 0243, 0249, 0265,

0268, 0269, 0274

Indiana 0268, 0271, 0274

Infinity 0088

InFocus 0168, 0277, 0313,

0397, 0430

Ingelen 0265

Ingersol 0261, 0273

Initial 0203

Inno Hit 0249, 0260, 0261,

0262, 0268, 0271,

0273, 0274, 0328

Innovation 0259, 0261

Insignia 0182, 0188, 0190,

0209

Inteq 0076

Interactive 0243

Interbuy 0261, 0273

Interfunk 0243, 0257, 0265,

0268, 0271, 0274

International 0327

Intervision 0243, 0259, 0260,

0263, 0274, 0328

Irradio 0249, 0261, 0262,

0268, 0271, 0273,

0274

Isukai 0262, 0274

ITC 0260, 0328

ITS 0262, 0268, 0270,

0274, 0327

ITT 0261, 0265

ITV 0261, 0271, 0274

Janeil 0107

JBL 0088

JC Penney 0072, 0073, 0085,

0090, 0099, 0103,

0106

JCB 0057, 0101

Jensen 0072, 0090

JVC 0017, 0018, 0019,

0092, 0093, 0094,

0106, 0251, 0252,

0266, 0268, 0293,

0360, 0379

Kaisui 0260, 0261, 0262,

0270, 0273, 0274,

0327, 0328

Kamosonic 0260

Kamp 0260, 0327

Kapsch 0265

Karcher 0243, 0260, 0261,

0271, 0274

Kawasho 0072, 0090, 0101,

0327

KEC 0225

Kendo 0243, 0263, 0264,

0274

Kenwood 0072, 0090, 0096

KIC 0328

Kingsley 0260, 0327

KLH 0117

Kloss Novabeam

0104, 0107

Kneissel 0243, 0250, 0274

Kolster 0268, 0274

Konka 0262

Korpel 0268, 0271, 0274

Korting 0243, 0257

Kosmos 0274

Koyoda 0261

KTV 0085, 0096, 0104,

0225, 0229, 0260,

0328

Kyoto 0327, 0328

Lasat 0243

Lenco 0261, 0273

Lenoir 0260, 0261, 0273

Leyco 0259, 0268, 0271,

0274

LG 0016, 0038, 0039,

0077, 0103, 0145,

0222, 0243, 0246,

0253, 0260, 0261,

0264, 0268, 0271,

0273, 0274, 0282,

0290, 0299, 0316,

0327, 0328, 0351,

0359, 0367, 0382,

0384, 0389, 0396

LG/GoldStar 0246

Liesenk 0271

Liesenkotter 0274

Life 0259, 0261

Lifetec 0259, 0261, 0273,

0274

Lloyds 0273

Loewe 0243, 0250, 0274,

0280, 0306, 0347

Loewe Opta 0257, 0268, 0271

Logik 0100

Luma 0264, 0271, 0273,

0274

Lumatron 0264, 0268, 0271,

0274, 0328

Lux May 0268

Luxman 0072, 0090

Luxor 0260, 0264, 0328

LXI 0061, 0065, 0071,

0072, 0073, 0077,

0088, 0099

M Electronic 0260, 0261, 0265,

0267, 0268, 0271

MAG 0050

Magnadyne 0257, 0263, 0271

Magnafon 0249, 0260, 0263,

0327

Magnavox 0072, 0088, 0090,

0091, 0095, 0096,

0098, 0114, 0115,

0129, 0134, 0176,

0178, 0189, 0210

Magnum 0259, 0261

Majestic 0100

Mandor 0259

Manesth 0259, 0260, 0268,

0271, 0274, 0328

Marantz 0072, 0088, 0090,

0096, 0158, 0268,

0271, 0274

Marelli 0257

Mark 0268, 0271, 0273,

0274, 0327, 0328

Masuda 0328

Matsui 0260, 0261, 0264,

0266, 0268, 0271,

0273, 0274, 0328,

0405

Matsushita 0067

Maxent 0193, 0226

Mediator 0268, 0271, 0274

Medion 0259, 0261, 0274

Megapower 0222

Megatron 0072, 0077

MElectronic 0273, 0274, 0327,

0328

Melvox 0275

Memorex 0065, 0072, 0077,

0100, 0103, 0133,

0219, 0261, 0273

Memphis 0261, 0273

Mercury 0273, 0274

Metz 0257

MGA 0072, 0077, 0090,

0096, 0103

Micromaxx 0259, 0261

Microstar 0259, 0261

Midland 0069, 0071, 0073,

0076, 0085, 0106,

0108

Minerva 0249

Minoka 0268, 0274

Mintek 0203

Mitsubishi 0006, 0015, 0016,

0048, 0072, 0077,

0090, 0103, 0196,

0224, 0257, 0266,

0268, 0274, 0298,

0371

Mivar 0243, 0249, 0250,

0260, 0327, 0328

Monivision 0222

Montgomery Ward

0100

Motion 0249

Motorola 0102, 0224

MTC 0072, 0090, 0096,

0103, 0243, 0327

Multi System 0271

Multitech 0104, 0225, 0229,

0243, 0260, 0261,

0263, 0264, 0266,

0271, 0273, 0274,

0327, 0328

Murphy 0260, 0327

NAD 0061, 0072, 0077

Naonis 0264

NEC 0026, 0053, 0072,

0090, 0096, 0102,

0103, 0266, 0328

Neckermann 0243, 0257, 0260,

0264, 0268, 0269,

0271, 0274, 0328

NEI 0268, 0271, 0274

Net-TV 0226

Neufunk 0273, 0274

New Tech 0261, 0268

New World 0262

NewTech 0273, 0274, 0328

Nicamagic 0260, 0327

Nikkai 0259, 0260, 0262,

0268, 0271, 0273,

0274, 0327, 0328

Nikko 0072, 0077, 0096

Nobliko 0249, 0260, 0263,

0327

Nokia 0265

Norcent 0155

Nordic 0328

Nordmende 0257, 0265, 0267,

0268

Nordvision 0271

Novatronic 0274

Oceanic 0265, 0275

Okano 0243, 0269, 0274

Olevia 0052, 0140, 0149,

0154, 0157

ONCEAS 0260

Onwa 0104, 0225

Opera 0274

Oppo 0208

Optimus 0065, 0067

Optoma 0194

Optonica 0224

Orbit 0268, 0274

Orion 0121, 0192, 0261,

0268, 0271, 0273,

0274, 0282, 0329

Orline 0274

Osaki 0259, 0260, 0262,

0274, 0328

Oso 0262

Otto Versand 0258, 0260, 0266,

0268, 0270, 0271,

0274, 0328

Pael 0260, 0327

Palladium 0243, 0260, 0269,

0274, 0328

Palsonic 0328

Panama 0259, 0260, 0261,

0273, 0274, 0327,

0328

Panasonic 0006, 0007, 0066,

0067, 0068, 0069,

0070, 0102, 0106,

0113, 0147, 0215,

0241, 0265, 0274,

0279, 0310, 0332,

0334, 0368, 0374

Panavision 0274

Pathe Cinema 0243, 0250, 0260,

0275, 0327

Pausa 0261, 0273

Penney 0061, 0069, 0071,

0077, 0096

Perdio 0274, 0327

Perfekt 0274

Philco 0072, 0088, 0090,

0091, 0094, 0096,

0102, 0103, 0243,

0249, 0257, 0274

Philharmonic 0260, 0328

Philips 0040, 0088, 0089,

0090, 0091, 0094,

0098, 0099, 0102,

0114, 0135, 0143,

0176, 0178, 0189,

0210, 0212, 0232,

0233, 0257, 0260,

0268, 0271, 0274,

0278, 0287, 0301,

0302, 0307, 0311,

0314, 0330, 0331,

0333, 0337, 0338,

0339, 0341, 0343,

0345, 0355, 0363,

0365, 0377, 0378,

0381, 0383, 0406,

0409, 0414

Philips Magnavox

0089, 0114, 0115

Phoenix 0243, 0257, 0268,

0271, 0274, 0327

Phonola 0257, 0268, 0271,

0274, 0327

Pilot 0085, 0090, 0096

Pioneer 0012, 0013, 0072,

0090, 0243, 0265,

0267, 0268, 0271,

0274, 0408

Plantron 0259, 0268, 0273,

0274

Playsonic 0328

Polaroid 0117, 0152, 0184,

0220

Poppy 0261, 0273

Portland 0072, 0085, 0090,

0103

Prandoni-Prince

0249, 0264

Precision 0260, 0328

Prima 0161, 0207, 0261,

0265, 0273

Princeton 0222

Prism 0069, 0106

Profex 0261, 0273

Profi-Tronic 0268, 0274

Proline 0268, 0274

Proscan 0071, 0073, 0099

Prosonic 0243, 0260, 0271,

0274, 0327, 0328

Protech 0259, 0260, 0261,

0263, 0268, 0271,

0328

Proton 0072, 0077, 0090,

0094

Protron 0150

PROVIEW 0050, 0164

Provision 0271, 0274

Pulsar 0076, 0090, 0108

Pye 0268, 0271, 0274,

0296, 0338

Pymi 0261, 0273

Quandra Vision

0275

Quasar 0067, 0069, 0102,

0106

Quelle 0259, 0260, 0268,

0271, 0274, 0328

Questa 0266

Radialva 0274

RadioShack 0065, 0071, 0077,

0096, 0225, 0274

RadioShack/Realistic

0072, 0085, 0090,

0094, 0099, 0104

Radiola 0268, 0271, 0274,

0328

Radiomarelli 0257, 0274

Radiotone 0243, 0268, 0273,

0274

Rank 0266

RCA 0071, 0072, 0073,

0074, 0075, 0090,

0099, 0102, 0103,

0109, 0120, 0179,

0218

Realistic 0065, 0077, 0096,

0225

Recor 0274

Redstar 0274

Reflex 0274

Revox 0243, 0268, 0271,

0274

Rex 0259, 0264, 0265

RFT 0243, 0250, 0257

Rhapsody 0327

R-Line 0268, 0271, 0274

Roadstar 0259, 0261, 0262,

0273

Robotron 0257

Rowa 0327, 0328

Royal Lux 0243

RTF 0257

Runco 0076, 0096, 0108

Saba 0257, 0265, 0267,

0272, 0376

Saisho 0259, 0260, 0261,

0273, 0328

Salora 0264, 0265

Sambers 0249, 0263

Sampo 0072, 0085, 0090,

0096, 0226

Samsung 0029, 0030, 0031,

0032, 0044, 0045,

0046, 0047, 0072,

0077, 0084, 0085,

0086, 0087, 0090,

0094, 0096, 0103,

0118, 0217, 0229,

0235, 0236, 0237,

0243, 0259, 0260,

0261, 0268, 0269,

0271, 0273, 0274,

0284, 0295, 0327,

0328, 0336, 0346,

0390, 0407

Sandra 0260, 0327, 0328

Sansui 0063, 0121, 0268,

0274

Sanyo 0020, 0021, 0022,

0049, 0065, 0090,

0141, 0191, 0243,

0250, 0260, 0266,

0273, 0291, 0327,

0328, 0370, 0373,

0391

SBR 0271, 0274

Sceptre 0166, 0185

Schaub Lorenz

0265

Schneider 0260, 0262, 0268,

0271, 0274, 0287,

0300, 0328, 0364,

0366

Scotch 0072, 0077

Scott 0072, 0077, 0090,

0094, 0104, 0105,

0199, 0225

Sears 0061, 0065, 0071,

0072, 0073, 0077,

0088, 0090, 0097,

0099, 0105

SEG 0259, 0260, 0263,

0266, 0271, 0273,

0274, 0300, 0327,

0328

SEI 0274

SEI-Sinudyne 0257, 0263, 0265

Seleco 0264, 0265, 0266

Sencora 0261, 0273

Sentra 0273

Serino 0327

Sharp 0009, 0010, 0011,

0072, 0080, 0081,

0082, 0083, 0085,

0090, 0094, 0110,

0148, 0183, 0216,

0224, 0247, 0248,

0258, 0266, 0288,

0304, 0324, 0325,

0340, 0358, 0362,

0369, 0386, 0392,

0398, 0400, 0401,

0403

Sheng Chia 0224

Shogun 0090

Siarem 0257, 0263, 0274

Sierra 0268, 0274

Siesta 0243

Signature 0100

Silva 0327

Silver 0266

Singer 0257, 0263, 0275

Sinudyne 0257, 0263, 0271,

0274

Skantic 0265

Solavox 0265

Sonitron 0243, 0328

Sonoko 0259, 0260, 0261,

0268, 0271, 0273,

0274, 0328

Sonolor 0265, 0275

Sontec 0243, 0268, 0271,

0274

Sony 0041, 0057, 0058,

0059, 0060, 0101,

0116, 0125, 0126,

0127, 0142, 0169,

0170, 0171, 0172,

0174, 0234, 0261,

0266, 0276, 0289,

0292, 0393, 0411

Sound & Vision

0262, 0263

Soundesign 0072, 0077, 0090,

0104, 0105, 0225

Soundwave 0268, 0271, 0274

Squareview 0097

SSS 0090, 0104, 0225

Standard 0260, 0261, 0262,

0268, 0273, 0274,

0328

Starlite 0104, 0225, 0271,

0273, 0274

Stenway 0270

Stern 0264, 0265

Strato 0273, 0274

Stylandia 0328

Sunkai 0261

Sunstar 0273, 0274

Sunwood 0261, 0268, 0273,

0274

Superla 0260, 0327, 0328

Superscan 0095, 0224

SuperTech 0273, 0274, 0327

Supra 0261, 0273

Supre-Macy 0107

Supreme 0057, 0101

Susumu 0262

Sutron 0261, 0273

SVA 0197

Sydney 0260, 0327, 0328

Sylvania 0072, 0088, 0089,

0090, 0091, 0095,

0096, 0097, 0098,

0175, 0177, 0210

Symphonic 0097, 0104, 0108,

0133, 0210, 0225

Syntax 0149

Syntax-Brillian

0149

Sysline 0271

Sytong 0327

Tandy 0224, 0258, 0260,

0262, 0265, 0328

Tashiko 0260, 0264, 0266,

0327, 0328

Tatung 0102, 0227, 0260,

0268, 0271, 0274,

0328

TCM 0259, 0261

Teac 0274, 0328

Tec 0260, 0261, 0273,

0328

Technics 0067, 0069, 0106

TechniSat 0320, 0417, 0418,

0419

Techwood 0069, 0072, 0090,

0106

TEDELEX 0328

Teknika 0072, 0085, 0088,

0090, 0094, 0100,

0103, 0104, 0105,

0225

Teleavia 0267

Telecor 0274, 0328

Telefunken 0267, 0268, 0272,

0274

Telegazi 0274

Telemeister 0274

Telesonic 0274

Telestar 0274

Teletech 0261, 0271, 0273,

0274

Teleton 0260, 0328

Televideon 0327

Televiso 0275

Tensai 0261, 0262, 0268,

0273, 0274, 0328

Tesmet 0268

Tevion 0259, 0261

Texet 0260, 0273, 0327,

0328

Thomson 0238, 0239, 0240,

0260, 0267, 0268,

0272, 0274, 0335

Thorn 0271, 0274

TMK 0072, 0077, 0090

TNCi 0076

Tokai 0268, 0274, 0328

Tokyo 0260, 0327

Tomashi 0270

Toshiba 0027, 0043, 0053,

0054, 0061, 0062,

0063, 0064, 0065,

0122, 0123, 0124,

0128, 0130, 0132,

0139, 0214, 0244,

0266, 0283, 0305,

0328, 0329, 0342,

0350, 0352, 0353,

0354, 0375, 0404

Totevision 0085

Towada 0265, 0328

Trakton 0328

Trans Continens

0274, 0328

Transtec 0327

Trident 0328

Triumph 0274

Uher 0243, 0249, 0265,

0268, 0274

Ultravox 0257, 0260, 0263,

0274, 0327

Unic Line 0274

United 0271

Universum 0243, 0249, 0259,

0268, 0269, 0271,

0274, 0328

Univox 0274

Vector Research

0096

Vestel 0264, 0265, 0268,

0269, 0271, 0274,

0328

Vexa 0261, 0271, 0273,

0274

Victor 0093, 0266, 0268

VIDEOLOGIC

0327

Videologique 0260, 0262, 0327,

0328

VideoSystem 0268, 0274

Videotechnic 0327, 0328

Vidikron 0088

Vidtech 0072, 0077, 0090,

0103

Viewsonic 0153, 0186, 0226,

0318

Viking 0107

Viore 0198

Visiola 0260, 0327

Vision 0268, 0274, 0328

Vizio 0090, 0136, 0160,

0227, 0420, 0421,

0422, 0423, 0424

Vortec 0268, 0271, 0274

Voxson 0249, 0257, 0264,

0265, 0268, 0274

Waltham 0260, 0274, 0328

Wards 0072, 0077, 0088,

0090, 0091, 0096,

0098, 0099, 0100,

0103, 0105

Watson 0268, 0271, 0274

Watt Radio 0260, 0263, 0327

Waycon 0061

Wega 0257, 0266, 0274

Wegavox 0273

Weltblick 0268, 0271, 0274,

0328

Westinghouse 0057, 0138, 0142

White Westinghouse

0008, 0119, 0260,

0263, 0271, 0274,

0327

Wincom 0055, 0056

Xrypton 0274

Yamaha 0000, 0001, 0002,

0003, 0004, 0005,

0072, 0090, 0096,

0103

Yamishi 0274, 0328

Yokan 0274

Yoko 0243, 0259, 0260,

0261, 0262, 0268,

0271, 0273, 0274,

0327, 0328

Yorx 0262

Zanussi 0264, 0328

Zenith 0076, 0077, 0078,

0079, 0090, 0100,

0108, 0111

VCR

ABS 1066

Adventura 1023

Adyson 1090

Aiwa 1023, 1072, 1073,

1074

Akai 1071, 1073

Akiba 1079, 1090

Akura 1073, 1079, 1090

Alba 1074, 1075, 1076,

1079, 1090, 1091

Alienware 1066

Ambassador 1076

American High

1022

Amstrad 1072, 1090, 1091

Anitech 1079, 1090

Apex 1010

ASA 1077, 1078

Asha 1020

Asuka 1072, 1077, 1078,

1079, 1090

Audio Dynamics

1018

Audiosonic 1091

Audiovox 1021

Baird 1072, 1073, 1075,

1091

Bang & Olufsen

1067

Basic Line 1074, 1075, 1076,

1079, 1090, 1091

Baur 1078

Beaumark 1020

Bell & Howell

1019

Bestar 1075, 1076, 1091

Black Panther Line

1075, 1091

Blaupunkt 1078

Bondstec 1076, 1090

Broksonic 1054

Bush 1074, 1075, 1079,

1090, 1091, 1097,

1099, 1109, 1139

Calix 1021

Candle 1020, 1021

Canon 1022

Cathay 1091

Catron 1076

CGE 1072, 1073

Cimline 1074, 1079, 1090

CineVision 1058

Citizen 1020, 1021

Clatronic 1076, 1090

Colortyme 1018

Condor 1075, 1076, 1091

Craig 1020, 1021

Crown 1075, 1076, 1079,

1090, 1091

Curtis Mathes 1018, 1020, 1022

Cybernex 1020

CyberPower 1066

Daewoo 1023, 1075, 1076,

1091, 1116, 1141

Dansai 1079, 1090, 1091

Dantax 1074

Daytron 1075, 1091

DBX 1018

De Graaf 1078

Decca 1072, 1073, 1078

Dell 1066

Denko 1090

DiamondVision

1050

DigiFusion 1092

DIRECTV 1035, 1038, 1040,

1059, 1060, 1061,

1065

Dish Network 1064

Dishpro 1064

Dual 1073, 1078, 1091

Dumont 1072, 1078

Durabrand 1032

Dynatech 1023

Echostar 1064

Elbe 1091

Elcatech 1090

Electrohome 1021

Electrophonic 1021

Elsay 1090

Elta 1079, 1090, 1091

Emerson 1021, 1022, 1023,

1070, 1090

ESC 1075, 1091

Etzuko 1079, 1090

Expressvu 1064

Ferguson 1073

Fidelity 1072, 1090

Finlandia 1078

Finlux 1072, 1073, 1078

Firstline 1074, 1077, 1079,

1090

Fisher 1019

Flint 1074

Formenti/Phoenix

1078

Frontech 1076

Fuji 1022

Fujitsu 1072

Funai 1023, 1072

Galaxy 1072

Garrard 1023

Gateway 1066

GBC 1076, 1079

GE 1020, 1022

GEC 1078

Geloso 1079

General 1076

General Technic

1074

GOI 1064

GoldHand 1079, 1090

Goldstar 1018, 1021, 1072,

1077

Goodmans 1072, 1075, 1076,

1077, 1079, 1090,

1091

Gradiente 1023

Graetz 1073

Granada 1078

Grandin 1072, 1075, 1076,

1077, 1079, 1090,

1091

Grundig 1078, 1079

Hanseatic 1077, 1078, 1091

Harley Davidson

1023

Harman/Kardon

1018

Harwood 1090

HCM 1079, 1090

Headquarter 1019

Hewlett Packard

1066

Hinari 1074, 1079, 1090,

1091

Hisawa 1074

Hitachi 1072, 1073, 1078,

1089, 1108, 1124

HNS 1060

Howard Computers

1066

HP 1066

HTS 1064

Hughes 1035, 1040, 1061

Hughes Network Systems

1038, 1060

Humax 1035, 1060, 1094

Hush 1066

Hypson 1074, 1079, 1090,

1091

vii

iBUYPOWER 1066

Impego 1076

Imperial 1072

Inno Hit 1075, 1076, 1078,

1079, 1090, 1091

Innovation 1074

Instant Replay 1022

Interbuy 1077, 1090

Interfunk 1078

Intervision 1072, 1091

Irradio 1077, 1079, 1090

ITT 1073

ITV 1075, 1077, 1091

JC Penney 1018, 1019, 1020,

1021, 1022

JCL 1022

JVC 1011, 1012, 1013,

1014, 1015, 1016,

1017, 1018, 1019,

1028, 1035, 1064,

1073, 1085, 1117,

1130, 1131, 1133,

1134, 1135, 1136

Kaisui 1079, 1090

Karcher 1078

Kendo 1074, 1075, 1076,

1090

Kenwood 1018, 1019, 1073

Kodak 1021, 1022

Korpel 1079, 1090

Kyoto 1090

Lenco 1075

Leyco 1079, 1090

LG 1021, 1053, 1072,

1077, 1088, 1100,

1106, 1125, 1143

Lifetec 1074

Linksys 1066

Lloyd’s 1023

Loewe Opta 1077, 1078

Logik 1079, 1090

Lumatron 1075, 1091

Luxor 1090

LXI 1021

M Electronic 1072

Magnavox 1022, 1032, 1044,

1070

Magnin 1021

Manesth 1079, 1090

Marantz 1018, 1019, 1022,

1078

Mark 1091

Marta 1021

Matsui 1074, 1077

Matsushita 1022

Media Center PC

1066

Mediator 1078

Medion 1074

MEI 1022

Memorex 1019, 1020, 1021,

1022, 1023, 1032,

1048, 1069, 1072,

1077

Memphis 1079, 1090

MGN Technology

1020

Micromaxx 1074

Microsoft 1066

Microstar 1074

Migros 1072

Mind 1066

Mitsubishi 1029, 1072, 1078

Motorola 1022

MTC 1020

Multitech 1020, 1023, 1072,

1076, 1078, 1079,

1090

Murphy 1072

NEC 1018, 1019, 1073

Neckermann 1073, 1078

NEI 1078

Nesco 1079, 1090

Nikkai 1076, 1090, 1091

Nikko 1021

Niveus Media 1066

Noblex 1020

Nokia 1073, 1091

Nordmende 1073

Northgate 1066

Oceanic 1072, 1073

Okano 1074, 1090, 1091

Olympus 1022

Optimus 1021

Orion 1033, 1069, 1074,

1097, 1139

Orson 1072

Osaki 1072, 1077, 1079,

1090

Otto Versand 1078

Palladium 1073, 1077, 1079,

1090

Panasonic 1007, 1008, 1009,

1022, 1026, 1042,

1043, 1068, 1082,

1101, 1126, 1132

Pathe Marconi 1073

Perdio 1072

Philco 1022, 1090

Philips 1022, 1030, 1035,

1038, 1039, 1040,

1044, 1055, 1060,

1078, 1084, 1095,

1096, 1104, 1105,

1111, 1113, 1122,

1124, 1127, 1128,

1129

Philips Magnavox

1030

Phonola 1078

Pilot 1021

Pioneer 1078, 1118

Polaroid 1010, 1049

Portland 1075, 1076, 1091

Prinz 1072

Profex 1079

Proline 1072

Proscan 1065

Prosonic 1074, 1091

Pulsar 1032

Pye 1052, 1078

Quarter 1019

Quartz 1019

Quasar 1022

Quelle 1072, 1078

Radialva 1090

RadioShack 1021

RadioShack/Realistic

1019, 1020, 1021,

1022, 1023

Radiola 1078

Radix 1021

Randex 1021

RCA 1020, 1022, 1025,

1035, 1040, 1047,

1060, 1065

Realistic 1019, 1020, 1021,

1022, 1023

ReplayTV 1041, 1068

Rex 1073

RFT 1076, 1078, 1090

Ricavision 1066

Roadstar 1075, 1077, 1079,

1090, 1091

Royal 1090

Runco 1032

Saba 1073

Saisho 1074, 1079

Samsung 1006, 1020, 1038,

1040, 1046, 1060,

1080, 1107, 1110,

1112, 1121, 1123,

1140, 1142

Samurai 1076, 1090

Sanky 1032

Sansui 1033, 1056, 1069,

1073

Sanyo 1019, 1020, 1114

Saville 1091

SBR 1078

Schaub Lorenz

1072, 1073

Schneider 1072, 1074, 1075,

1076, 1077, 1078,

1079, 1090, 1091

Sears 1019, 1021, 1022

SEG 1079, 1090, 1091

SEI-Sinudyne 1078

Seleco 1073

Sentra 1076, 1090

Sentron 1079, 1090

Sharp 1031, 1045, 1057,

1081, 1115, 1137

Shintom 1079, 1090

Shivaki 1077

Shogun 1020

Siemens 1077

Silva 1077

Silver 1091

Singer 1022

Sinudyne 1078

Solavox 1076

Sonic Blue 1041, 1068

Sonneclair 1090

Sonoko 1075, 1091

Sontec 1077

Sony 1000, 1001, 1002,

1003, 1024, 1027,

1036, 1062, 1066,

1083, 1098, 1103,

1138

Stack 1066

Stack 9 1066

Standard 1075, 1091

Stern 1091

STS 1022

Sunkai 1074

Sunstar 1072

Suntronic 1072

Sunwood 1079, 1090

Superscan 1070

Sylvania 1022, 1023, 1044,

1052, 1070

Symphonic 1023, 1044, 1090

Systemax 1066

Tagar Systems 10 66

Taisho 1074

Tandberg 1091

Tandy 1019

Tashiko 1021, 1072

Tatung 1072, 1073, 1078

TCM 1074, 1093, 1120

Teac 1023, 1091

Tec 1076, 1090, 1091

Technics 1022

Teknika 1021, 1022, 1023

Teleavia 1073

Telefunken 1073

Teletech 1090, 1091

Tenosal 1079, 1090

Tensai 1072, 1077, 1079,

1090

Tevion 1074

Thomson 1073, 1087

Thorn 1073

Tivo 1035, 1036, 1037,

1039, 1040, 1060,

1061, 1062

TMK 1020

Tokai 1077, 1079, 1090

Tonsai 1079

Toshiba 1004, 1005, 1034,

1051, 1063, 1066,

1073, 1078, 1086,

1099, 1102, 1119,

1144

Totevision 1020, 1021

Touch 1066

Towada 1079, 1090

Towika 1079, 1090

TVA 1076

Uher 1077

UltimateTV 1065

Ultravox 1091

Unitech 1020

United Quick Star

1075, 1091

Universum 1072, 1077, 1078

Vector Research

1018

Video Concepts

1018

Videon 1074

Videosonic 1020

Viewsonic 1066

Voodoo 1066

Wards 1020, 1021, 1022,

1023

Weltblick 1077

XR-1000 1022, 1023

Yamaha 1018, 1019

Yamishi 1079, 1090

Yokan 1079, 1090

Yoko 1076, 1077, 1079,

1090

Zenith 1032

ZT Group 1066

DVD

4Kus 2097

Accurian 2220

Advent 2169, 2201

AEG 2312

Airis 2318

Aiwa 2272

Akai 2170, 2195, 2225,

2227

Akura 2310

Alba 2018, 2232, 2247,

2259, 2264

Alco 2199

Alize 2315

Allegro 2215

Amitech 2312

Amphion MediaWorks

2145

AMW 2145, 2313

Apex 2044, 2045, 2046,

2047, 2076, 2208,

2209

Apple 2163

Arrgo 2216

Asono 2318

Aspire 2140, 2202

Astar 2162

viii

ATACOM 2318

Audiovox 2111, 2199

Avious 2317

Awa 2313

Axion 2171

Bang & Olufsen

2210

Baze 2317

BBK 2318

Bellagio 2313

Best Buy 2309

Blaupunkt 2209

Blue Parade 2207

Boghe 2300

Brainwave 2312

Brandt 2198, 2238

Broksonic 2192, 2195

Bush 2018, 2060, 2248,

2264, 2301, 2308,

2317, 2350, 2368

California Audio Labs

2197

Cambridge Audio

2304

CAT 2306, 2307

CAVS 2146

Centrum 2307

CGV 2304, 2312

Changhong 2222

Cinetec 2313

CineVision 2191, 2215

Clatronic 2308, 2317

Coby 2077, 2124, 2314

Conia 2301

Continental Edison

2313

Crown 2312

C-Tech 2305

Curtis Mathes 2217

CVG 2299

CyberHome 2048, 2068, 2216,

2233, 2258

Cytron 2166

Daenyx 2313

Daewoo 2083, 2215, 2280,

2299, 2312, 2313,

2326, 2376

Daewoo International

2313

Dalton 2311

Dansai 2303, 2312

Daytek 2145, 2234, 2313

Dayton 2313

DEC 2308

Decca 2312

Denon 2105, 2147, 2197,

2286

Denver 2288, 2308, 2310,

2314

Denzel 2302

Desay 2159

Diamond 2304, 2305

DiamondVision

2179, 2186

Disney 2078, 2088

DK Digital 2257

Dmtech 2226

Dual 2302

Durabrand 2218

DVX 2305

Easy Home 2309

Eclipse 2304

E-Dem 2318

Electrohome 2312

Elin 2312

Elta 2263, 2312, 2315

Emerson 2196, 2211, 2219

Enterprise 2211

Enzer 2302

Epson 2165

ESA 2219

Finlux 2304, 2312, 2317

Fintec 2299

Fisher 2212

Funai 2219

Gateway 2097

GE 2079, 2206, 2209

Gericom 2269

GFM 2176

Giec 2300

Global Solutions

2305

Global Sphere 2305

Go Video 2135, 2215

Goodmans 2247, 2289, 2298,

2300, 2308, 2330,

2369

GPX 2177

Gradiente 2197

Graetz 2302

Greenhill 2209

Grundig 2271

Grunkel 2312, 2316

GVG 2299

H&B 2308

H_her 2318

Haaz 2304, 2305

Haier 2172

Harman/Kardon

2125, 2213

HiMAX 2309

Hitachi 2008, 2033, 2108,

2302, 2309, 2320,

2366

Hiteker 2208

Home Tech Industries

2318

Hyundai 2316

Ilo 2167

Initial 2167, 2209

Innovation 2228

Insignia 2080, 2175, 2219

Integra 2207

Irradio 2103

iSymphony 2164

JBL 2213

JVC 2049, 2050, 2051,

2052, 2053, 2054,

2055, 2056, 2057,

2070, 2242, 2261,

2275, 2276, 2277,

2278, 2339, 2340,

2341, 2342, 2386,

2387, 2389, 2390,

2391

Jwin 2148

Kansai 2314

Kawasaki 2199

Kennex 2312

Kenwood 2123, 2197, 2270

KeyPlug 2312

Kiiro 2312

Kingavon 2308

Kiss 2302

KLH 2199, 2209

Koda 2308

Koss 2095, 2198, 2204

KXD 2309

Landel 2221

Lasonic 2214

Lawson 2305

Lecson 2303

Lenco 2308, 2312, 2317

Lenoxx 2203, 2218

LG 2080, 2107, 2115,

2116, 2141, 2188,

2211, 2215, 2237,

2239, 2285, 2293,

2295, 2348, 2370

Life 2228

Lifetec 2228

Limit 2305

Liquid Video 2204

Liteon 2097, 2121, 2220

Loewe 2274

LogicLab 2305

Magnavox 2075, 2096, 2178,

2180, 2196, 2205,

2219, 2308

Magnex 2317

Majestic 2314

Marantz 2282

Marquant 2312

Matsui 2198, 2296

McIntosh 2149

Mecotek 2312

Medion 2228

Memorex 2078, 2184, 2195

MiCO 2300, 2304

Micromaxx 2228

Microsoft 2206

Microstar 2228

Minoka 2312

Minowa 2317

Mintek 2167, 2209

Mitsubishi 2081

Mizuda 2308, 2309

Monyka 2302

Mustek 2232

Mx Onda 2304

Mystral 2316

Naiko 2312

Nesa 2209

Neufunk 2302

Nevir 2312

Next Base 2221

Nexxtech 2161

NU-TEC 2301

Onkyo 2205, 2290

Oopla 2097

Oppo 2150, 2173

Optim 2303

Optimus 2230

Orava 2308

Orbit 2313

Orion 2027, 2060

Oritron 2198, 2204

P&B 2308

Pacific 2305

Panasonic 2015, 2016, 2017,

2036, 2037, 2038,

2039, 2040, 2041,

2042, 2043, 2074,

2089, 2104, 2108,

2112, 2120, 2131,

2132, 2197, 2205,

2244, 2245, 2246,

2253, 2254, 2255,

2292, 2321, 2324,

2327, 2328, 2329,

2331, 2383, 2388

Parasound 2151

peeKTON 2318

Philips 2026, 2061, 2062,

2075, 2090, 2094,

2096, 2097, 2103,

2110, 2126, 2180,

2193, 2205, 2231,

2235, 2241, 2251,

2252, 2256, 2260,

2268, 2282, 2332,

2333, 2343, 2344,

2345, 2367, 2371,

2373, 2380, 2382,

2385

Phonotrend 2317

Pioneer 2012, 2013, 2014,

2063, 2064, 2065,

2066, 2067, 2113,

2134, 2207, 2230,

2236, 2265, 2266,

2267, 2297, 2322,

2351, 2352, 2353,

2354, 2355, 2356,

2357, 2358, 2359,

2377

Pointer 2312

Polaroid 2047, 2133, 2185

Portland 2312

Powerpoint 2313

Prima 2174

Proceed 2208

Proscan 2206

Prosonic 2299, 2314

Protron 2152

Provision 2308

Pye 2194

Qwestar 2198

Raite 2302

RCA 2058, 2059, 2071,

2079, 2183, 2199,

2206, 2207, 2209

RedStar 2310, 2312, 2314

Regent 2203

Reoc 2305

Rimax 2315

Rio 2215

Roadstar 2281, 2308

Ronin 2313

Rotel 2153

Rowa 2200, 2301

Rownsonic 2307

Saba 2198, 2238

Sabaki 2305

Saivod 2312

Sampo 2223

Samsung 2031, 2032, 2033,

2034, 2035, 2082,

2127, 2137, 2138,

2154, 2182, 2197,

2283, 2319, 2325,

2346, 2347, 2349,

2372, 2381

Sansui 2027, 2195, 2304,

2305, 2312

Sanyo 2139, 2195, 2212,

2374

ScanMagic 2232

Schaub Lorenz

2312

Schneider 2226

Scientific Labs

2305

Scott 2243, 2311

Seeltech 2318

SEG 2240, 2302, 2305,

2313

Sharp 2009, 2010, 2084,

2122, 2142, 2143,

2144, 2181, 2190,

2228, 2262, 2375

Shinsonic 2167

Sigmatek 2309, 2318

Silva 2310

Singer 2304, 2305

Skymaster 2279, 2305

The letters in circles and the numbers in squares correspond to those in the Owner's Manual.

■Front panel

RX-V2065

ON/OFF

PHONES

MAIN ZONE

SILENT CINEMA

TONE CONTROL

PROGRAM

STRAIGHT PURE DIRECT

INPUT

OPTIMIZER MIC

VIDEO

HDMI IN

AUDIO

THROUGH

VIDEO

AUX

VOLUME

HDMI

EFFECT

BD/DVD

RADIO

SCENE

INFO

PRESET

lhlh

MEMORY

ZONE2

ON/OFF

ZONE

CONTROLS

ZONE3

ON/OFF

BAND

CATEGORY

TUNING/CH

USB

LPNSOQ T

ABC D E G HFIJK

UMR V

■Remote control

SLEEPSOURCE

USB/NET

1 2 3 4

5 6 1 2

PHONO

MULTI

DOCK

TUNER SIRIUS

HDMI

V-AUX

CATEGORY

FM AM

INFO

MEMORY

PRESET

TUN./CH

MUSIC

SUR. DECODE

MOVIE

STRAIGHT

HDMI OUT

PURE DIRECT

DVD TV

RADIO

7 85 6

9 0

1 2 3 4

REC

ENT

POWER

INPUT

MUTE

ENTER

VOLUME

TV VOL TV CH

TAG PRG SELECT

MUTE

ENHANCER

STEREO

ON SCREEN OPTION

MAIN

POWER

USB NET RADIO PC RHAPSODY

POWER

TOP

SCENE

RETURN

DISPLAY

POP-UP

HDMI

AUDIO

ZONE 2

ZONE 3

TRANSMIT

CODE SET

Printed in Malaysia WS30800

Skyworth 2310

Slim Art 2312

SM Electronic 2305

Sonic Blue 2215

Sontech 2316

Sony 2005, 2006, 2007,

2020, 2021, 2022,

2023, 2024, 2025,

2069, 2072, 2073,

2085, 2086, 2087,

2091, 2092, 2093,

2102, 2128, 2129,

2130, 2249, 2250,

2323, 2334, 2335,

2336, 2360, 2361,

2362, 2363, 2364,

2365, 2384

Soundmaster 2305

Soundmax 2305

Spectra 2313

Spectroniq 2155

Standard 2305

Star Cluster 2305

Starmedia 2308, 2318

Sungale 2158

Sunkai 2312

Superscan 2196

Supervision 2305

Sylvania 2094, 2180, 2189,

2196, 2219, 2224

Symphonic 2062, 2180

Synn 2305

T.D.E. Systems

2316

Tatung 2083, 2312

TCM 2228, 2379

Teac 2199, 2287, 2301,

2305

Tec 2310

Technics 2197

Technika 2312, 2317

Telefunken 2307

Tensai 2312

Tevion 2228, 2305, 2311

Theta Digital 2207

Thomson 2229, 2238, 2284,

2294

Tokai 2302, 2310

Top Suxess 2318

Toshiba 2004, 2026, 2027,

2028, 2029, 2030,

2098, 2099, 2100,

2101, 2114, 2117,

2118, 2119, 2136,

2187, 2195, 2205,

2291, 2337, 2338,

2378

TRANScontinents

2313, 2317

Transonic 2317

Trio 2312

Trutech 2160

TruVision 2309

TSM 2318

Umax 2315

United 2317

Urban Concepts

2205

US Logic 2167

Venturer 2199

Viewmaster 2318

Vocopro 2156

VocoStar 2157

Waitec 2318

Welltech 2300

Westinghouse 2109, 2168

Wharfedale 2304, 2305

Woxter 2315, 2318

Xbox 2206, 2229

Xlogic 2305, 2312

XMS 2312

Xoro 2300

Yamada 2097, 2313, 2315

Yamaha 2000, 2001, 2002,

2003, 2011, 2018,

2019, 2036, 2106,

2197, 2273

Yamakawa 2302, 2313

Yukai 2232

Zenith 2080, 2141, 2205,

2211, 2215

Blu-ray Disc

LG 2115

Panasonic 2089, 2131, 2132

Pioneer 2134

Samsung 2035, 2127

Sharp 2142, 2143, 2144

Sony 2025

Yamaha 2018

DVR

Bush 2060

Panasonic 2037, 2038, 2039,

2040, 2041, 2042

Philips 2061, 2062

Pioneer 2063, 2064, 2065,

2066, 2067

RCA 2059

Samsung 2035

Yamaha 2036

DVD Recorder

Aspire 2140

Astar 2162

Broksonic 2192

Go Video 2135

Hitachi 2108

Insignia 2080

Irradio 2103

JVC 2054, 2055, 2056,

2057

LG 2107, 2115, 2141,

2188

Liteon 2121

Panasonic 2037, 2038, 2039,

2041, 2042, 2043,

2089, 2104, 2108,

2112

Philips 2090, 2096, 2097,

2126, 2193

Pioneer 2067, 2113

Pye 2194

Samsung 2034, 2082, 2138

Sansui 2027

Sanyo 2139

Sony 2022, 2023, 2024,

2085, 2086, 2087,

2102, 2128, 2129,

2130

Sylvania 2189

Toshiba 2030, 2099, 2100,

2101, 2114, 2117,

2118, 2119

Yamaha 2106

Cable

ABC 3004, 3015, 3016,

3017, 3037, 3040,

3067, 3080, 3081

ADB 3070

Adelphia 3003

Alcatel 3066

Americast 3046

Amstrad 3048, 3068

Antronix 3019, 3020

Archer 3020

Arcon 3048

AT&T 3013

Axis 3048

Bell South 3046

Cable Vision 3014

Cabletenna 3019

Cabletime 3058

Cableview 3005

Clearmaster 3045

ClearMax 3045

Clyde Cablevision

3059

Colour Voice 3022

Comcast 3006, 3010, 3039

Comcrypt 3057

Comtronics 3023

Contec 3024

Coolmax 3045

COX 3006

Cryptovision 3060

Director 3006

Eastern 3025

Everquest 3041

Fidelity 3048

Filmnet 3057

Filmnet Cablecrypt

3061

Filmnet Comcrypt

3061

Finlux 3051

Focus 3044

Foxtel 3068

France Telecom

3054, 3055

Freebox 3069

GC Electronics

3020

GE 3015, 3016

GEC 3059

Gemini 3026, 3041

General Instrument

3006, 3008, 3016,

3039, 3050, 3067,

3075

Goldstar 3042

Gooding 3049

Grundig 3048, 3049

Hamlin 3027, 3028

Hirschmann 3051

Hitachi 3016

HomeChoice 3056

Humax 3001, 3002, 3071

ITT Nokia 3051

Jasco 3041

Jerrold 3006, 3008, 3016,

3026, 3037, 3041,

3050, 3064, 3067,

3075

JVC 3049

Kabel Deutschland

3043, 3073, 3074

Macab 3055

Magnavox 3029

Maspro 3049

Matsui 3049

MegaCable 3039

Memorex 3030, 3040

Minerva 3049

Mnet 3057

Motorola 3006, 3008, 3010,

3013, 3039, 3072,

3075

Movie Time 3031, 3063

Mr Zapp 3055

Multichoice 3057

Multitech 3045

NEC 3018

NET Brazil 3007

Nokia 3051

Noos 3055

NSC 3031

Oak 3024

Pace 3011, 3043, 3084

Palladium 3049

Panasonic 3034, 3036, 3040

Paragon 3040

Philips 3021, 3022, 3029,

3049, 3053, 3054,

3055

Pioneer 3012, 3032, 3038,

3042, 3048, 3083,

3084

Popular Mechanics

3044

Proscan 3015, 3016

Pulsar 3040

PVP Stereo Visual Matrix

3064

Quasar 3040

RadioShack 3041, 3045

RCA 3005, 3036, 3076,

3077

Realistic 3020

Recoton 3044

Regal 3028

Regency 3025

Rembrandt 3016

Runco 3040

Sagem 3055

Samsung 3011, 3023, 3032,

3042

SAT 3048

Scientific Atlanta

3003, 3004, 3011,

3012, 3013, 3062,

3078, 3079, 3080,

3081, 3082, 3083,

3084

Signal 3026, 3041

Signature 3016

Sony 3014, 3047

Sprucer 3036

Standard Component

3033

Starcom 3026, 3037, 3041,

3067

Stargate 3026, 3041

Starquest 3026, 3041

Supercable 3008

Supermax 3045

Tele+1 3057, 3061

Telepiu 3057

Thomson 3000, 3009

TIME WARNER

3006

Tocom 3017

Torx 3067

Toshiba 3040

Tristar 3045

Tudi 3052

Tusa 3026, 3041

TV86 3031

Unika 3019, 3020

United Cable 3037, 3064

Universal 3019, 3020

Universum 3049, 3051

V2 3045

Videoway 3065

View Star 3024, 3029, 3031

Viewmaster 3045

Vision 3045

Visiopass 3051, 3054, 3055

Vortex View 3045

Wittenberg 3048

Zenith 3035, 3040, 3046

Zentek 3044

Sattelite

AB Sat 4138, 4139

AccessHD 4058

ADB 4142

AGS 4138

Akai 4101, 4103

Alba 4083, 4084, 4085,

4086, 4108, 4139

Aldes 4085, 4087, 4088

Allsat 4098, 4101, 4103

Allsonic 4074, 4087, 4090

Alltech 4139

Alpha 4103

Alpha Digital 4058

Alphastar 4031

Amitronica 4139

Amstrad 4089, 4113, 4136,

4139

Anglo 4139

Ankaro 4074, 4087, 4090,

4139

Anttron 4083, 4086

Apollo 4083

Armstrong 4089, 4103

Artec 4054

Asat 4101, 4103

ASLF 4139

Astacom 4138

Astra 4089, 4091, 4100,

4137, 4139

Astro 4074, 4086, 4088,

4090, 4093, 4135,

4136, 4137

AudioTon 4086, 4098

Aurora 4140

Austar 4140

Axiel 4138

Axis 4074, 4090, 4091,

4096

Best 4074, 4090

Blaupunkt 4093

Blue Sky 4139

Boca 4089, 4100, 4105,

4139

Boston 4138

Brain Wave 4095

Broadcast 4094

Broco 4139

BSkyB 4113, 4123

BT 4138

Bubu Sat 4139

Bush 4084, 4127

Cambridge 4136

Canal Satellite 4135

Canal+ 4135

CaptiveWorks 4049

Channel Master

4060, 4085

Chaparral 4025

CHEROKEE 4138

Chess 4134, 4139

CityCom 4084, 4133, 4137

Clatronic 4095

CNT 4088

Comag 4000, 4001, 4002,

4003, 4004

Commlink 4087

Comtech 4096

Condor 4074, 4090, 4137

Connexions 4074, 4092

Conrad 4074, 4133, 4136,

4137

Conrad Electronic

4137, 4139

Contec 4096

Coolsat 4050

Cosat 4098

Coship 4063

Crown 4089

Daeryung 4092

Daewoo 4107, 4139

DDC 4085

Delega 4085

Dew 4096

Diamond 4097

Digiality 4137

Digital Stream 4059

DIRECTV 4017, 4018, 4020,

4021, 4022, 4024,

4037, 4038, 4040,

4041, 4043, 4045,

4057, 4106, 4143,

4144, 4145, 4146,

4147, 4148, 4149,

4150, 4151, 4152,

4153, 4154, 4155,

4156, 4157

Discoverer 4134

Discovery 4138

Diseqc 4138

Dish Network 4011, 4012, 4013,

4014, 4019, 4039,

4064

Dishpro 4039, 4064

Distrisat 4103

Ditristrad 4098

DNT 4092, 4101, 4103

Drake 4026

DStv 4140

Dune 4074

Echostar 4011, 4019, 4039,

4064, 4092, 4139

Einhell 4083, 4087, 4089,

4136, 4139

Elap 4138, 4139

Elekta 4088

Elsat 4139

Elta 4074, 4083, 4090,

4098, 4101, 4103

Emanon 4083

Emme Esse 4074, 4090

Engel 4139

Ep Sat 4084

EURIEULT 4077

Eurodec 4102

Europa 4103, 4136, 4137

Europhon 4137

Eurosat 4089

Eurosky 4074, 4089, 4090,

4133, 4136, 4137

Eurostar 4089, 4133, 4137

Eutelsat 4139

Exator 4083, 4086

Expressvu 4039

Fenner 4074, 4134, 4139

Ferguson 4084, 4102, 4132

Fidelity 4136

Finlandia 4084

Finlux 4084

FinnSat 4096, 4102

Flair Mate 4139

Foxtel 4140

Freecom 4083, 4099, 4136

FTEmaximal 4074, 4139

Fuba 4074, 4083, 4090,

4092, 4093, 4101,

4133

Galaxis 4074, 4087, 4090,

4091, 4096, 4098,

4133, 4140

GE 4015, 4016, 4061,

4151

General Instrument

4027, 4065

GMI 4089

GOI 4039

Goldbox 4135

GoldStar 4099

Goodmans 4079, 4080, 4084

Goodmind 4061

Grandin 4077

Grothusen 4083, 4099

Grundig 4084, 4086, 4093,

4113, 4129, 4136,

4140

Hänsel & Gretel

4137

Hantor 4083, 4095

Hanuri 4088

Hauppauge 4126

Heliocom 4137

Helium 4137

Hinari 4085

Hirschmann 4074, 4093, 4128,

4136, 4137, 4138

Hisawa 4095

Hisense 4066

Hitachi 4032, 4084, 4149,

4153

Homecast 4005, 4006, 4007

Houston 4098

HTS 4039

Hughes 4018, 4022, 4144,

4146, 4150, 4152

Hughes Network Systems

4021

Humax 4051, 4075, 4076,

4110

Huth 4087, 4089, 4094,

4095, 4096, 4098,

4137, 4141

Hypson 4077

Ilo 4066

Imex 4077

Innovation 4090

Insignia 4057

Intertronic 4089

Intervision 4098, 4137

ITT Nokia 4084

Jerrold 4065

Johansson 4095

JOK 4138

JSR 4098

JVC 4011, 4019, 4039,

4079

Kamm 4139

Kathrein 4093, 4101, 4103,

4109, 4112, 4120,

4133, 4138, 4139

Kathrein Eurostar

4133

Klap 4138

Konig 4137

Kosmos 4099

KR 4086

Kreiselmeyer 4093

K-SAT 4139

Kyostar 4083

L&S Electronic

4074

Lasat 4074, 4088, 4090,

4100, 4133, 4134,

4137

Lasonic 4062

Lenco 4074, 4083, 4099,

4133, 4137, 4139

Leng 4095

Lennox 4098

Lenson 4136

Lexus 4103

LG 4053, 4057, 4099

Lifesat 4074, 4090, 4134,

4139

Lifetec 4090

Lorenzen 4137

Lorraine 4099

Lupus 4074, 4090

Luxor 4136

Lyonnaise 4102

Macab 4102

Magnavox 4045, 4055

Manata 4077, 4138, 4139

Manhattan 4084, 4088, 4098,

4138

Marantz 4101

Mascom 4088

Maspro 4084, 4139

Matsui 4138

Max 4137

Mediabox 4135

Mediamarkt 4089

Mediasat 4091, 4135, 4136

Medion 4074, 4090, 4139

Medison 4139

Mega 4101, 4103

Memorex 4045

Metronic 4077, 4078, 4083,

4086, 4087, 4088,

4139

Metz 4093

Micro electronic

4136, 4137, 4139

Micro Technology

4139

MicroGem 4056

Micromaxx 4074, 4090

Microstar 4090

Microtec 4139

Minerva 4093

Mitsubishi 4084, 4093, 4152

Mitsumi 4100

Morgan’s 4089, 4100, 4101,

4103, 4139

Motorola 4008, 4009, 4010,

4065

Multichoice 4140

Multitec 4134

Muratto 4099

Mysat 4139

Navex 4095

Neuhaus 4091, 4098, 4136,

4137, 4139

Neusat 4139

Next Level 4065

NextWave 4141

Nikko 4089, 4139

Nokia 4084, 4122

Nordmende 4083, 4084, 4085,

4088, 4102

Nova 4140

Novis 4095

Oceanic 4097

Octagon 4083, 4086, 4096

Okano 4089

Optex 4098

Optus 4135, 4140, 4141

Orbitech 4083, 4134, 4135,

4136

OSat 4086

Otto Versand 4093

Pace 4084, 4093, 4113,

4121, 4125, 4138

Pacific 4097

Packsat 4138

Palcom 4085

Palladium 4089, 4136

Palsat 4134, 4136

Panasat 4140

Panasonic 4043, 4044, 4046,

4084, 4113, 4118,

4143, 4148

Panda 4084, 4137

Pansat 4047

Patriot 4138

Paysat 4045

PCT 4060

Philco 4055

Philips 4021, 4022, 4045,

4084, 4101, 4103,

4111, 4115, 4135,

4138, 4150, 4152,

4153, 4155, 4156

Phoenix 4096

Phonotrend 4084, 4087, 4098

Pioneer 4124, 4135

Polsat 4102

Predki 4095

Premiere 4098, 4135

Priesner 4089

Primestar 4030

Profile 4138

Promax 4084

Prosat 4085, 4087

Proscan 4015, 4016, 4040,

4151

Protek 4097

Proton 4066

Provision 4088

Quadral 4074, 4085, 4087,

4090, 4138

Quelle 4093, 4133, 4137

Quiero 4102

RadioShack 4065

Radiola 4101, 4103

Radix 4092, 4119

Rainbow 4086

RCA 4015, 4016, 4034,

4035, 4036, 4037,

4038, 4040, 4151,

4157

Realistic 4028

Redpoint 4091

Redstar 4074, 4090

RFT 4087, 4101, 4103

Roadstar 4139

Roch 4077

Rover 4074, 4139

Saba 4088, 4133, 4137,

4138

Sabre 4084

Sagem 4069, 4102

Sakura 4096

Samsung 4018, 4021, 4023,

4041, 4042, 4081,

4082, 4083, 4114,

4150, 4154

SAT 4085, 4136

Sat Cruiser 4141

Sat Partner 4083, 4086, 4088,

4095, 4099, 4136

Sat Team 4139

Satcom 4094, 4137

Satec 4139

Satelco 4074

Satford 4094

Satmaster 4094

Satplus 4134

Schneider 4090, 4134, 4138

Schwaiger 4097, 4134, 4137

SCS 4133

Seemann 4089, 4091, 4092

SEG 4074, 4083, 4090,

4095

Seleco 4098

Servi Sat 4077, 4139

Siemens 4093

Silva 4099

Skantin 4139

Skardin 4091

Skinsat 4136

SKR 4139

Skymaster 4067, 4068, 4087,

4134, 4139

Skymax 4101, 4103

SkySat 4134, 4136, 4137,

4139

Skyvision 4098

SM Electronic 4134, 4139

Smart 4133, 4139

Sony 4017, 4020, 4135

SR 4089, 4100

Star Choice 4065

Starland 4139

Starring 4095

Start Trak 4083

Strong 4074, 4083, 4086,

4090, 4099, 4140

STS 4033

STVI 4077

Sumida 4089

Sunny Sound 4074

Sunsat 4139

Sunstar 4074, 4089, 4100

Supermax 4141

Tandberg 4102

Tandy 4086

Tantec 4084

TCM 4090

Techniland 4094

TechniSat 4071, 4072, 4073,

4092, 4103, 4116,

4117, 4134, 4135,

4136

Technology 4140

Technosat 4141

Technowelt 4137

Teco 4089, 4100

Telanor 4085

Telasat 4133, 4137

Telecom 4139

Telefunken 4067, 4083, 4138

Teleka 4086, 4089, 4092,

4136, 4137

Telemaster 4088

Telesat 4137

Telestar 4134, 4135, 4136

Televes 4084, 4136

Telewire 4098

Tempo 4141

Tevion 4090, 4139

Thomson 4070, 4084, 4102,

4104, 4130, 4133,

4135, 4137, 4138,

4139

Thorens 4097

Thorn 4084

Tivax 4058

Tivo 4150

Tokai 4103

Tonna 4084, 4094, 4098,

4136, 4139

Toshiba 4144, 4152, 4153

Triad 4099

Triasat 4136

Triax 4093, 4133, 4136,

4139

Turnsat 4139

Tvonics 4132

Twinner 4077, 4139

UEC 4140

Uher 4134

UltimateTV 4020

Uniden 4029, 4045

Unisat 4089, 4096, 4103

Unitor 4095

Universum 4093, 4133, 4137

US Digital 4066

Variosat 4093

Vega 4074

Ventana 4101, 4103

Viewsat 4048

Visiosat 4095, 4098, 4138,

4139

Voom 4065

Vortec 4083

Welltech 4134

WeTeKom 4134, 4136

Wevasat 4084

Wewa 4084

Winersat 4095

Wisi 4084, 4092, 4093,

4136, 4137

Woorisat 4088

Worldsat 4138

Xrypton 4074

XSat 4139

Zehnder 4074, 4088, 4090,

4131, 4133

Zenith 4052, 4057, 4145

Zodiac 4086

Yamaha 5000, 5013

CD Recoder

Yamaha 5001

Yamaha 5002, 5003, 5004

Tape

Yamaha 5005, 5006

Tuner

Yamaha 5007, 5008, 5009,

5010, 5014, 5015,

5016, 5017, 5018

USB

Yamaha 5012, 5021

DOCK

Yamaha 5011, 5022

Yamaha 2002

RX-V2065

AV R e c e i ve r

OWNER’S MANUAL

00_RX-V2065_U_cv.fm Page 1 Wednesday, June 24, 2009 4:10 PM

Black process 45.0° 240.0 LPI

Yamaha RX V2065 Owner's Manual U

Navigation menu

Versions of this User Manual:

Views

Navigation